JP7100371B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, in a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition such as a game ball winning a prize in a starting opening is satisfied, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is favorable to the player. In this determination, the probability that the gaming state is determined to be advantageous to the player cannot be arbitrarily set in the gaming machine.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2018-473333

However, there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the gaming machine, in which it is determined whether or not the gaming state is favorable to the player.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances. That is, the subject is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the gaming interest.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A determination means for determining whether or not to make the gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and
A setting means capable of setting a specific condition for the determination means to make the determination, and a setting means.
It is equipped with a staging control means capable of executing a predetermined staging by the staging means.
The staging means includes a vibrating body capable of vibrating and a speaker capable of outputting sound.
The effect control means may execute a specific effect of vibrating the vibrating body and outputting a vibration sound corresponding to the vibration based on the result of the determination and the specific condition .
The specific effect includes a first specific effect in which the number of times the vibrating body vibrates in the specific effect and the number of times the vibrating sound is output are the same, and the number of times the vibrating body vibrates in the specific effect and the above. There is a second specific effect that differs from the number of times the vibration sound is output.
It is characterized in that the possibility of becoming the advantageous gaming state differs between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed .

According to the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the entertainment interest.

It is a perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a front view of a game board unit. (A) is a front view explaining the standby state of the board movable body, (B) is a front view explaining the moving state of the board movable body, and (C) is a front view explaining the rotating state of the board movable body. It is a front view of the display. It is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on the basic embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a game control board side. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the staging control board side. (A) is a table showing the general map-related determination information, and (B) is a table showing the special map-related determination information. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a hit determination table, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of an auxiliary game control table. be. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination table when the set value is "1", and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination table when the set value is "2". (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination table when the set value is "3", and (D) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination table when the set value is "4". (E) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination table when the set value is "5", and (F) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the jackpot determination table when the set value is "6". (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a reach determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 1st look-ahead determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the 2nd look-ahead determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot game control table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a game state setting table. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a demo movie, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a first normal background image, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a second normal background image, and (C) shows an example of a third normal background image. It is a figure, (D) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for probabilistic variation, (E) is a figure which shows an example of the background image for time saving. (A) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot opening effect, (B) is a diagram showing an example of a round effect, and (C) is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot ending effect. (A) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of an effect symbol display area. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation effect of the loss without reach. It is a figure which shows an example from the start of a special figure variation effect to the reach. It is a figure which shows an example of N reach. It is a figure which shows an example of L reach. It is a figure which shows an example of L reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 27. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 27. It is a figure which shows an example of SP reach, and is the continuation of FIG. 28. It is a figure which shows an example of a movable body production. It is a figure which shows an example of an operation effect. It is a figure which shows an example of a hold production. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a figure which shows an example of the hold icon change notice. It is a flowchart of a game control main process. It is a flowchart of a setting value setting process. It is a flowchart of the game control side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of a sensor detection process. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 37. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of a special operation process. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a variation pattern determination process. It is a flowchart of special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of the staging control main process. It is a flowchart of 1ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of 10ms timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 48. It is a top view of the upper plate of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the staging control board side of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a background music method switching determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of an automatic volume switching determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the staging control board side of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the vibration of the look-ahead hybrid effect, and the vibration sound. It is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the vibration of each type 1 hybrid effect and the vibration sound. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between the vibration and the vibration sound of various 2nd hybrid staging. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table, (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the hybrid effect execution determination table, and (C) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the hybrid effect type determination table. Is. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the vibration frequency determination table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the advance notice effect execution determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table. It is a perspective view which integrally represented the pachinko gaming machine and the card unit which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a top view of the upper plate 34 of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game control board side of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a specific example of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect of the normal mode, (B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect of the first special mode, and (C) is a prepaid of the second special mode. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the effect of preventing forgetting to take. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special aspect execution determination table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 3rd Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value information suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6", and (B) is a setting value information suggestion effect execution determination associated with the setting value "5". It is a figure which shows the structural example of a table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value information suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "4", and (B) is a setting value information suggestion effect execution determination associated with the setting value "3". It is a figure which shows the structural example of a table. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of the setting value information suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the setting value "2", and (B) is the setting value information suggestion effect execution determination associated with the setting value "1". It is a figure which shows the structural example of a table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the setting value suggestion effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment. (A) is a diagram showing a specific example of the left-handed effect of the normal aspect, (B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the left-handed effect of the first special aspect, and (C) is a specific example of the left-handed effect of the second special aspect. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the special aspect execution determination table of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the game control board side of the pachinko game machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the sensor detection process which concerns on 6th Embodiment, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 37. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the staging control board side of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis processing which concerns on 6th Embodiment, and is the figure which shows the continuation of FIG. 48. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a semi-confirmation effect execution determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a confirmation effect execution determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the quasi-confirmation effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the 1st confirmation effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the 2nd confirmation effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the 3rd confirmation effect by the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on 6th Embodiment.

<Basic embodiment>
First, a basic embodiment of the present invention, which is a premise of the characteristic portion of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. In each of the referenced figures, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and duplicate explanations regarding the same parts will be omitted in principle. In the following, for the sake of simplicity of description, by describing a symbol or a code that refers to an information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc., the name of the information, a signal, a physical quantity, a member, etc. for the symbol or the code is omitted or abbreviated. Sometimes.

1. 1. Mechanical Configuration of Gaming Machine A pachinko gaming machine PY, which is a basic embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention, will be described. First, the mechanical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. In the following description, the left-right and up-down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY are the left-right and up-down directions (front view) for the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY. Further, "front" is the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY to approach the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY, and "rear" is the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY to approach the pachinko gaming machine PY. ,explain.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko game machine PY includes a game board unit YU including the game board 1 and a game machine frame 2 in which the game board unit YU is housed. The gaming machine frame 2 has a frame-shaped outer frame 21 fixed to the game store, an inner frame 22 attached to the outer frame 21 to which the gaming board unit YU is attached, and before being rotatably supported by the inner frame 22. It is provided with a door 23.

The outer frame 21, the inner frame 22, and the front door 23 have substantially the same outer shape in front view. The inner frame 22 is attached to the front surface of the outer frame 21.

The front door 23 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 22. The front door 23 includes a frame-shaped front frame 23 m in which a large opening having a substantially vertically long rectangular shape is formed in the center thereof, and a transparent plate 23t fitted in the opening. When the front door 23 is closed, the game board 1 included in the game board unit YU and the transparent plate 23t face each other. The transparent plate 23t is a transparent synthetic resin plate and is formed into a substantially vertically long rectangular shape. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY is installed in the game store, the player in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY can visually recognize the gaming area 6 formed on the front surface of the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. can. As the transparent plate 23t, a transparent glass plate may be used instead of the transparent synthetic resin plate. It suffices if the gaming area 6 can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY through the transparent plate 23t.

At the lower right of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, a handle 72k that can be rotated to launch a game ball is provided. The amount by which the handle 72k is operated (rotation angle) is associated with the magnitude of the force (launch intensity) applied to the game ball to launch the game ball. Therefore, the game ball is launched with a firing intensity corresponding to the rotation operation of the handle 72k.

Further, at the lower part of the front surface of the front frame 23 m, an upper plate 34 that protrudes greatly forward and a lower plate 35 arranged directly under the upper plate 34 are provided. At the center of the front side of the upper plate 34, a first effect button 40k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion visibly protruding from the upper surface of the upper plate 34 of the first effect button 40k is formed into a hemispherical shape. Further, on the rear side of the upper surface of the upper plate 34, a supply ball storage hole 34A for storing the game ball supplied to the handle 72k is formed. Further, on the upper surface of the lower plate 35, a surplus ball storage hole 35A for storing a surplus game ball that cannot be accommodated in the supply ball storage hole 34A is provided.

Further, on the upper side, the right side, and the left side of the transparent plate 23t on the front surface of the front frame 23 m, the upper side decorative body 31, the right side decorative body 32, and the left side decorative body 33 are provided. On the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, a pair of two speakers 52 capable of outputting sound, specifically, a speaker 52L arranged on the left side and a speaker 52R arranged on the right side are predetermined in the left-right direction facing downward. They are arranged side by side at a distance. Further, at the lower part of the right decorative body 32, a second effect button 41k that can be pressed downward is provided. The operation portion of the second effect button 41k is formed into a rod shape. Further, a frame lamp 53 capable of emitting light is provided from the right decorative body 32 to the front right portion of the upper plate 34 and from the left decorative body 33 to the front left portion of the upper plate 34.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the gaming machine frame 2 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the gaming.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described with reference to FIG. 2 in addition to FIG. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a board production unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. A substantially circular opening 1A is formed in the substantially center of the game board 1.

On the front surface of the game board 1, a substantially ring-shaped center decorative body 61 is formed so as to project forward along the opening 1A. Further, on the outside of the center decorative body 61, an outer rail 62 formed in a substantially ring shape so as to largely surround the center decorative body 61, and an outer rail between the left side portion of the outer rail 62 and the center decorative body 61. A curved inner rail 63, which is substantially parallel to the center decoration 61, is formed.

Then, on the front surface of the game board 1, the area surrounded by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, the inner rail 63, and the like forms the game area 6. That is, the front surface of the game board 1 is divided into a game area 6 and other areas by the center decorative body 61, the outer rail 62, and the inner rail 63. Further, the area surrounded by the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 63 forms a launch area 7 through which the launched game ball can pass toward the game area 6.

The gaming area 6 is an area in which a gaming ball launched by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine PY. A large number of gaming nails (not shown) are projected in the gaming area 6. The game nail appropriately connects the game ball that enters the game area 6 and flows down the game area 6 to the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the gate 13, the large winning opening 14, and the like. It constitutes a route to guide to.

A general winning device 10D is provided at a predetermined position in the game area 6. In the general winning device 10D, the general winning opening 10 is formed so that a game ball can be entered. When the game balls enter the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the general winning opening 10 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a first start winning device 11D is provided immediately below the center of the center decorative body 61 in the game area 6. In the first start winning device 11D, the first start opening 11 is formed so that a game ball can enter. The first start winning device 11D has a non-operating structure that does not operate. Therefore, the first starting port 11 is constant (invariant) without changing the ease of entering the game ball. When the game balls enter the first starting port 11, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the first starting port 11 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

From the left side portion to the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61, a warp portion 61w through which the game ball is passed is formed. The entrance to the warp portion 61w is formed on the left side portion of the center decoration body 61. The game ball that has entered the warp portion 61w passes through the inside of the warp portion 61w and exits from the exit. A stage 61s on which a game ball can roll is provided on the upper surface of the lower end portion of the center decorative body 61 near the exit of the warp portion 61w. At the tip of the stage 61s, a downward guiding portion 61y that guides the game ball downward is provided. A first starting port 11 is provided directly below the downward guide portion 61y.

A second start winning device (so-called "electric chew") 12D is provided immediately below the first start opening 11 in the game area 6. The electric chew 12D is formed with a second starting port 12 that can be changed into a closed mode in which the game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which the game ball can enter. The second starting port 12 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the electric chew opening / closing member 12k provided in the electric chew 12D. That is, the second starting port 12 is opened and closed by the operation of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k.

The electric chew opening / closing member 12k is composed of a substantially L-shaped member in front view, and normally closes the second starting port 12. The electric chew opening / closing member 12k can project forward from the retracted state where the front end surface is flush with the game area 6. When the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes forward, the electric chew opening / closing member 12k protrudes vertically to the game area 6, and the second starting port 12 opens so that the ball can enter. Specifically, the vertical portion erected at the left end of the horizontal portion of the electric chew opening / closing member 12k receives the game ball and is guided from the horizontal portion to the second starting port 12.

In this way, the game ball can enter the second starting port 12 only when the electric chew opening / closing member 12k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the second starting port 12, a predetermined number (for example, 4) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the second starting port 12 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, a gate 13 is provided on the right side of the center decoration body 61. The gate 13 is configured to allow a game ball to pass through. Even if the game ball passes through the gate 13, the prize ball is not paid out. The game ball that has passed through the gate 13 flows down the game area 6 as it is.

A large winning device 14D is provided on the right side of the first starting winning device 11D in the game area 6 and on the downstream side of the gate 13. The large winning device 14D is formed with a large winning opening 14 that can be changed into a closed mode in which a game ball cannot enter and an open mode in which a game ball can enter. The big winning opening 14 takes a closed mode and an open mode by the AT opening / closing member 14k provided in the big winning device 14D. That is, the large winning opening 14 is opened and closed by the operation of the AT opening / closing member 14k.

The AT opening / closing member 14k is a movable member made of a flat plate having a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in front view, and normally closes the large winning opening 14. A horizontal rotation axis is provided at the lower end of the AT opening / closing member 14k. The AT opening / closing member 14k can rotate about 90 degrees around its axis of rotation so that its upper end tilts forward. When the AT opening / closing member 14k rotates, the AT opening / closing member 14k is in a state of projecting vertically to the game area 6, and the large winning opening 14 is opened so that the ball can be entered.

In this way, it is possible to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 14 only when the AT opening / closing member 14k is in the open state. When the game balls enter the large winning opening 14, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening 14 is discharged to the outside of the game area 6 as it is.

Further, below the large winning device 14D in the game area 6, the upper surface thereof is formed diagonally downward to the left, and the guidance path 64 for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 12 is the game area 6 (front surface of the game board 1). It is provided so as to project forward from. The game ball rolling on the upper surface of the guidance path 64 can flow down toward the second starting port 12, but basically cannot enter the first starting port 11.

In addition, the entry of the game ball into the first start port 11, the second start port 12, the large winning opening 14, and the general winning opening 10 and the passage of the game ball through the gate 13 are collectively referred to as the first starting port 11, Collectively referred to as "winning" to the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, the general winning opening 10, and the gate 13.

By the way, the game area 6 on which the game ball can flow down can be divided into a left game area 6A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 6B on the right side. The operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the left game area 6A is called "left-handed". On the other hand, the operation mode of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that the game ball flows down the right game area 6B is called "right-handed".

In the game area 6, the flow path through which the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting left is called the first flow path R1, and the game ball can flow down when the game ball is launched by hitting right. The flow path is referred to as a second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a large number of gaming nails (not shown).

A first starting port 11 and two general winning openings 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the general winning opening 10 by firing the game ball so as to flow down the first flow path R1 by hitting left. On the other hand, a second starting port 12, a gate 13, and a large winning opening 14 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, the player can aim to win a prize in the gate 13, the second starting opening 12, or the large winning opening 14 by launching the game ball so as to flow down the second flow path R2 by hitting right.

It should be noted that, at the substantially lowermost portion of the game area 6, two out ports 19 are provided to discharge the game balls that have been driven into the game area 6 but have not won any of the winning openings to the outside of the game area 6. There is. In addition, the number of prize balls for winning each winning opening can be set as appropriate.

Next, the board effect unit EU attached to the back surface of the game board 1 will be described. The board production unit EU is a unitization of a plurality of devices that mainly perform production. An image display device 50 and a board movable device 55 are attached to the board effect unit EU.

The image display device 50 is composed of a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display, and includes a display unit 50a capable of displaying a 3D image. The image display device 50 is arranged several centimeters behind the game board 1.

The board movable device 55 includes a movable board movable body 55k. The board movable body 55k has a horizontally long plate-shaped elevating member 55k2 that is maintained in a horizontal state, and a substantially elliptical rotating member 55k1 provided at the center of the elevating member 55k2 in the left-right direction. The board movable body 55k is arranged between the game board 1 and the image display device 50. In the standby state of the board movable body 55k, the lower end portion of the board movable body 55k, specifically, the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 is slightly downward from the upper end of the opening 1A of the game board 1. positioned. That is, the board movable body 55k is arranged so that only a part of the lower end portion of the rotating member 55k1 can be seen by the player and most of it cannot be seen in the standby state (see FIG. 3A).

Then, the board movable body 55k can descend from the initial position to a predetermined operating position as a whole, rise from the operating position, and return to the initial position (see FIG. 3B). The predetermined operating position is a position where the movable board 55k is located substantially in the center of the opening 1A when viewed from the front. Here, a predetermined work position can be appropriately set, regardless of whether the board movable body 55k is placed above or below the substantially center of the opening 1A in front view. good.

Further, the rotating member 55k1 can rotate clockwise and counterclockwise in the front view around the rotation axis formed in the front-rear direction at the center thereof (see FIG. 3C). The rotational movement of the rotating member 55k1 can be executed when the board movable body 55k moves from the standby position to the operating position, is held at the operating position, and moves from the operating position to the standby position.

The positions and numbers of the members and devices provided in the game board unit YU can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

Next, the indicators 8 arranged on the right side (the portion other than the game area 6) substantially at the center in the vertical direction of the game area 6 formed on the front surface of the game board 1 will be described. As shown in FIG. 4, the display device 8 includes a special figure 1 display 81a for variably displaying the first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 1”) and a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as “special figure 2”). A special figure 2 display 81b for variably displaying) and a normal figure display 82 for variably displaying a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as “normal figure”) are included. Further, the indicators 8 include a special figure 1 hold indicator 83a for displaying the special figure 1 hold number described later and a special figure 2 hold indicator 83b for displaying the special figure 2 hold number described later. ..

The variable display of the special figure 1 is executed when the special figure 1 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 11 is performed. Further, the variable display of the special figure 2 is executed when the special figure 2 lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 12 is performed. The special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery will be described later. In the following description, special figure 1 and special figure 2 are collectively referred to as "special figure", and special figure 1 lottery and special figure 2 lottery are collectively referred to as "special figure lottery". Further, the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as "special figure display 81". Further, the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

The variable display of the special figure informs the result of the special figure lottery. In the variable display of the special figure, the special figure is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stop-displayed special figure (stop special figure) is identification information representing the result of the special figure lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. If the stop-displayed special figure is a predetermined special figure, a big hit game is performed with the opening of the big winning opening 14.

The special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b are each composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side. The lighting mode of the special figure 1 display 81a and the special figure 2 display 81b represents a special figure corresponding to the result of the special figure lottery, that is, the result of the special figure lottery. For example, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a big hit, the final result is "□□ ■■ □□ ■■" (□: lit, ■: off), which is the first, second, fifth, and sixth from the left. A certain LED lights up. This lighting mode is a jackpot symbol and represents a jackpot. If the result of the special drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the far right, such as "■■■■■■■ □", will finally light up. This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the special drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all the LEDs may be turned off as a lost pattern.

Further, in the variable display of the special map, the variable display of the special map is performed over a predetermined fluctuation time before the special map is stopped and displayed. The mode of the variable display of the special figure is, for example, a mode in which each LED is turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), all the LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once.

By the way, in the pachinko gaming machine PY, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing may not be performed immediately even if the gaming ball wins a prize in the first starting opening 11 or the second starting opening 12. Specifically, it is a case where a prize is given to the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12 of the game ball during the execution of the variable display of the special figure or the execution of the jackpot game. In this case, the special drawing lottery and the variable display of the special drawing are suspended based on the winning. This reserved special drawing lottery and variable display of special drawings are called "special drawing reservations".

The special drawing hold includes the special drawing 1 lottery held based on the winning of the first starting port 11, the "special drawing 1 holding" representing the variable display of the special drawing 1, and the winning of the second starting opening 12. There are a special figure 2 lottery held based on the above, and a "special figure 2 hold" representing the variable display of the special figure 2. Then, the special figure 1 hold display 83a displays the number of the special figure 1 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 1 lottery and the variable display of the special figure 1. On the other hand, the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b displays the number of the special figure 2 hold, that is, the number of the special figure 2 lottery held and the variable display of the special figure 2.

It is possible to set or not set the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold. Further, when an upper limit is set for the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold, the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold may be the same or different. In the basic embodiment, it is assumed that the upper limit of the number of special figure 1 hold and the number of special figure 2 hold is set to "4".

Each of the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a and the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is composed of four LEDs, and by turning on the LEDs for the number of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Figure 1 Displays the number of holds and Special Figure 2 Holds. In the following, the number of special figure 1 hold is referred to as "special figure 1 hold number (U1)", and the number of special figure 2 hold is referred to as "special figure 2 hold number (U2)". In addition, "special figure 1 hold number" and "special figure 2 hold number" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold number". Further, the "special figure 1 hold indicator 83a" and the "special figure 2 hold indicator 83b" are collectively referred to as "special figure hold indicator 83".

Further, the variable display of the normal map is executed when the general map lottery triggered by the winning of the game ball to the gate 13 is performed. Then, the variable display of the normal map informs the result of the normal map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed in a variable manner and then stopped. The stopped-displayed normal map (stop-displayed normal map) is identification information representing the result of the normal map lottery derived as the display result of the variable display. When the stop-displayed normal map is a predetermined specific normal map, an auxiliary game is performed with the opening of the second starting port 12.

The normal figure display 82 is composed of, for example, two LEDs. The lighting mode of the normal figure display 82 represents a normal figure according to the result of the normal figure lottery, that is, the result of the normal figure lottery. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is a hit, both LEDs will eventually turn on, such as "□□" (□: on, ■: off). This lighting mode is a hit symbol and represents a hit. If the result of the regular drawing lottery is lost, only the LED on the right will light up, such as "■ □". This lighting mode is a loss symbol and represents a loss. The lighting mode of the LED corresponding to the result of the general drawing lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. For example, a mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol.

Further, before the normal map is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the normal map is performed for a predetermined fluctuation time. In the basic embodiment, the variation display of the normal diagram is an embodiment in which both LEDs are turned on alternately. It should be noted that the mode of variable display in the normal drawing is not particularly limited, and if each LED is not stopped display (lighting display in a specific mode), all LEDs may be appropriately set such as blinking all at once. ..

2. 2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 7. As shown in FIG. 5, on the back side of the pachinko game machine PY, a game control board 100 that controls a game that can obtain a game profit (progress of the game), and a game control board 100 according to the progress of the game. Power is supplied to the effect control board 120 that controls the effect, the image control board 140 that controls the image, the payout control board 170 that controls the payout of the game ball, and the boards 100, 120, 140, 170. The power supply board 190 is attached.

A power switch 191 is connected to the power supply board 190. The power is turned on / off by turning the power switch 191 on and off.

A set value cylinder 70 for changing a set value, which will be described later, and a set value switch 71 are provided in the vicinity of the game control board 100. The set value cylinder 70 is provided with an insertion hole 70A into which a dedicated setting key is inserted. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the insertion hole 70A, the set value cylinder 70 can be rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the reference standby state. Then, as will be described later, the operation of the set value switch 71 becomes effective by rotating the set value cylinder 70 90 degrees clockwise from the standby state. The set value switch 71 is configured to be pressable. Further, a set value display 87 for displaying the current set value is mounted on the surface of the game control board 100. Further, the set value display 87 is composed of a red 7-segment display.

As shown in FIG. 6, a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “game control microcomputer”) 101 that controls the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to a program is mounted on the game control board 100. Therefore, the game control board 100 can be positioned as a game control unit that controls the game. In addition, the game that can acquire the game profit to be controlled by the game control board 100 includes a special figure lottery, a variable display of the special figure, a big hit game, a game state setting described later, a normal figure lottery, and a variable display of the normal figure. , Auxiliary games, etc. are included.

The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 that is used as a work memory, and a game. A gaming CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes a program stored in the ROM 103 is included.

The game ROM 103 stores a program for performing a game control main process, a game control side timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. Further, the game ROM 103 includes a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special figure variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a game state setting table, a hit determination table, and an auxiliary. A game control table and the like are stored. The gaming ROM 103 may be externally attached.

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a special figure holding storage unit 105. Here, the special figure reservation storage unit 105 will be described. As described above, if there is a prize in the first start opening 11 or the second start opening 12 of the game ball, the special figure hold can occur, but if the special figure hold is possible, that is, the number of special figure hold is When the upper limit has not been reached, determination information consisting of various random numbers for performing a special drawing lottery or the like is acquired based on this winning. Then, this determination information is temporarily stored in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure hold. In the following, the determination information acquired by winning a prize in the first starting port 11 of the game ball is referred to as "special figure 1 related determination information", and is acquired by winning a prize in the second starting port 12 of the game ball. Judgment information is referred to as "special figure 2 related judgment information". Further, the special figure 1 related judgment information and the special figure 2 related judgment information are collectively referred to as "special figure related judgment information".

Then, the special figure 1 related determination information is stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 1 hold. On the other hand, the special figure 2 related determination information is stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b in the special figure hold storage unit 105 as the special figure 2 hold. The number of special figure 1 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 1 hold number is set to "4". Further, the number of special figure 2 related determination information that can be stored in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b, that is, the upper limit of the special figure 2 hold number is set to "4".

Further, the gaming RAM 104 is provided with a set value storage unit 107 for storing set value data indicating a set value described later.

Further, various sensors and solenoids are connected to the game control board 100 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by various sensors are input to the game control board 100. Further, the game control board 100 outputs signals to various actuators.

Various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a general winning opening sensor 10a, a first starting opening sensor 11a, a second starting opening sensor 12a, a gate sensor 13a, and a large winning opening sensor 14a. ..

The general winning opening sensor 10a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the general winning opening 10. The first starting port sensor 11a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting port 11. The second starting port sensor 12a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second starting port 12. The gate sensor 13a detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 13. The large winning opening sensor 14a detects a game ball that has won a prize in the large winning opening 14.

Further, various sensors connected to the game control board 100 include a set value cylinder sensor 70a and a set value switch sensor 71a.

Further, the set value cylinder sensor 70a can detect the rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70. When there is a rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70, the set value cylinder sensor 70a detects the rotation operation of the set value cylinder 70, and a detection signal indicating that the set value cylinder 70 has been rotated is sent to the game control board. Output to 100.

On the other hand, the set value switch sensor 71a can detect the pressing operation of the set value switch 71. When the set value switch 71 is pressed, the set value switch sensor 71a detects the pressed operation of the set value switch 71, and a detection signal indicating that the set value switch 71 is pressed is transmitted to the game control board. Output to 100.

Further, various actuators connected to the game control board 100 include an electric chew solenoid 12s and an AT solenoid 14s. The electric chew solenoid 12s drives the electric chew opening / closing member 12k of the electric chew 12D. The AT solenoid 14s drives the AT opening / closing member 14k of the prize-winning device 14D.

The type and number of sensors connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as the game is not hindered. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the game control board 100 can be appropriately changed as long as the game is not hindered.

Further, the game control board 100 is connected to the display 8 (special figure display 81, normal figure display 82, and special figure hold display 83) and the set value display 87. The display control of these indicators 8 and the set value indicator 87 is performed by the game control microcomputer 101.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands to the payout control board 170, and also receives signals from the payout control board 170 for payout monitoring. A card unit CU and a payout device 73 are connected to the payout control board 170, and a launcher 72 is also connected to the payout control board 170. Further, the card unit CU is a device that is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY and enables ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card.

The payout control board 170 drives the payout motor 73 m of the payout device 73 to pay out prize balls and rental balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 101 and the signal from the connected card unit CU. The prize balls and rental balls to be paid out are detected by the payout sensor 73a for counting.

Further, the launching device 72 is a device for launching a game ball. The handle 72k constitutes an operation unit or an input unit that receives an operation for launching the game ball to the launching device 72, and is included in the launching device 72. The handle 72k is provided with a touch switch 72a capable of detecting contact of a person such as a player with the handle 72k. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the contact of the player with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170 via the launch control circuit 175.

Further, a firing volume knob 72b capable of detecting the rotation angle (operation amount) of the handle 72k is connected to the handle 72k. The launching device 72 drives the launching motor 72m so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the knob 72b of the firing volume. In the pachinko gaming machine PY, one gaming ball is launched about every 0.6 seconds while the rotation operation to the handle 72k is maintained.

Further, the game control board 100 transmits various commands including information about the game to the effect control board 120 according to the progress of the game. The effect control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (game control content) by the game control board 100 based on various commands sent from the game control board 100.

The connection between the game control board 100 and the effect control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the game control board 100 to the effect control board 120. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the game control board 100 and the staging control board 120.

As shown in FIG. 7, the staging control board 120 is mounted with a staging control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as “staging control microcomputer”) 121 that controls the staging of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to a program. The staging control board 120 can be positioned as an staging control unit that controls the staging together with the image control board 140, the voice control circuit 161 and the sub drive board 162, which will be described later. However, the staging control unit includes at least the staging control board 120, and uses the staging device (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board movable body 55k, etc.) for game staging, customer waiting staging, and operation promotion. It suffices if the production can be controlled.

The effects to be controlled by the effect control board 120 include game effects (special figure variation effect, hold effect, jackpot game effect, etc.), customer waiting effect, and operation of the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k. It includes an operation promotion effect that encourages operation during a valid period (operation valid period).

The staging control microcomputer 121 is stored in a staging ROM 123 that stores a program for controlling the staging as the game progresses by the game control board 100, a staging RAM 124 that is used as a work memory, and a staging ROM 123. The staging CPU 122 that executes the program is included.

The effect ROM 123 stores a program for performing an effect control main process, a receive interrupt process, a 1 ms timer interrupt process, a 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the like, which will be described later. The production ROM 123 may be externally attached.

The effect RAM 124 has a start winning command holding storage unit 125 that stores a start winning command described later, a symbol designation command storage unit 126 that stores a symbol designation command described later, and a special figure variation that stores a special figure fluctuation start command described later. A start command storage unit 127 and a setting value flag storage unit 128 for storing a setting value flag described later are provided.

Further, the image control board 140 is connected to the staging control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 of the effect control board 120 controls the display of the image display device 50 on the image control board 140 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. To do. The connection between the effect control board 120 and the image control board 140 can be both transmission of a signal from the effect control board 120 to the image control board 140 and transmission of a signal from the image control board 140 to the effect control board 120. It is a two-way communication connection.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores a program for image control and the like, an image RAM 143 that is used as a work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes a program stored in the image ROM 142. .. Further, the image control board 140 is a CGROM (Character Generator Read Only Memory) 145 that stores image data displayed on the image display device 50, and a VRAM (Video) used for developing image data stored in the CGROM 145. It is equipped with a Random Access Memory) 146 and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. All or part of these electronic components may be composed of one chip.

In the CGROM 145, for example, image data for displaying an image displayed on the image display device 50 (still image data, moving image data, specifically, a character, an item, a pattern, a figure, a character, a number, a symbol, etc.) (effect). Image data such as (including patterns) and background images) are stored.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and expands it in the expansion area in the VRAM 146 according to the display list created by the image CPU 141 based on the command from the effect control microcomputer 121. Then, the expanded image data is appropriately combined and the image is drawn in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. Then, the image drawn in the frame buffer is output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various staging images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

The display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters such as the type of image to be drawn, the position where the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the transmittance of the image.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 uses the voice, music, and music from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 based on the command received from the game control board 100, that is, according to the progress of the game by the game control board 100. Output sound effects, etc.

Audio data such as audio output from the speaker 52 is stored in the effect ROM 123 of the effect control board 120. The voice control circuit 161 may be configured on a board to mount a CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute voice control. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. Further, the speaker 52 may be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may execute voice control. Further, in this case, the audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

Further, various sensors serving as an input unit and various actuators serving as a drive source are connected to the staging control board 120 via a predetermined relay board (not shown). Signals output from various sensors are input to the staging control board 120. Further, the staging control board 120 outputs signals to various actuators.

The various switches connected to the effect control board 120 include a first effect button sensor 40a and a second effect button sensor 41a. The first effect button sensor 40a detects that the first effect button 40k has been pressed. The second effect button sensor 41a detects that the second effect button 41k has been pressed. When the first effect button sensor 40a and the second effect button sensor 41a detect that they have been operated, they output a signal corresponding to the detection content to the effect control board 120.

The type and number of switches connected to the staging control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game. Further, the type and number of actuators connected to the staging control board 120 can be appropriately changed as long as they do not interfere with the game.

The various actuators connected to the staging control board 120 include a motor for rotating members 55m1 and a motor for elevating members 55m2. The rotary member motor 55m1 can drive the rotary member 55k1 to rotate the rotary member 55k1. The elevating member motor 55m2 can raise or lower the elevating member 55k2. Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and controls the operation of the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2 via the sub drive board 162. ..

In the following, the operations of the "rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2" may be collectively referred to as "the operation of the board movable body 55k". Further, rotating the rotating member 55k1 and lowering or raising the elevating member 55k2 are also referred to as "rotating, lowering or raising the board movable body 55k".

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls the lighting of the frame lamp 53 and the like via the sub drive board 162 based on the command received from the game control board 100 and the like. In detail, the staging control microcomputer 121 creates light emission pattern data (data for determining lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) for determining the light emission mode of the frame lamp 53, and the frame lamp 53 is in accordance with the light emission pattern data. Control the light emission. The data stored in the staging ROM 123 of the staging control board 120 is used to create the light emission pattern data.

The sub drive board 162 may be configured by the board to mount the CPU. In this case, the CPU may be made to execute the lighting control of the frame lamp 53 and the like and the operation control of the board movable body 55k. Further, in this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and data related to the light emission pattern and the operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

3. 3. Main games by the gaming machine Next, the main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 16.

3-1. Games related to Fuzu First, we will explain the games related to Fuzu. The pachinko gaming machine PY can execute a general drawing lottery when the launched gaming ball passes through the gate 13. When the normal map lottery is performed, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map (stop display after performing variable display). Here, there are a hit symbol and a lost symbol in the normal map that is stopped and displayed. In addition, the lost symbol of the normal figure is also referred to as "missing normal figure" in order to distinguish it from the lost symbol of the special figure described later.

When the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when the lost normal map is stopped and displayed, the auxiliary game is not performed, and the game related to the passage of the gate 13 ends. Further, in the following, the fact that the game ball passes through the gate 13 when the variable display of the normal map or the auxiliary game is not performed is referred to as "the establishment of the normal map variation start condition".

The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform a series of games such as a normal map lottery, a variable display of the normal map, and an auxiliary game by satisfying the normal map variation start condition and acquiring the normal map related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8A, the acquired general map-related determination information includes a normal symbol random number. Ordinary symbol random numbers are random numbers (judgment information) for performing collision detection. A range is appropriately provided for each random number.

3-1-1. Hit determination The hit determination is a determination for determining whether or not to hit (whether or not to execute an auxiliary game) using, for example, a hit determination table as shown in FIG. 9A. The hit determination table can be associated with the gaming state described later. When associated with the game state, the hit determination table includes a hit determination table (non-time reduction hit determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a hit determination table (time reduction hit determination table) used in the time reduction state.

In each hit determination table, the determination value of the normal symbol random number (ordinary symbol random number determination value) is appropriately distributed to the hit and the loss which are the results of the hit determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired ordinary symbol random numbers with the hit determination table, and determines whether the hit or miss is a hit. If the result of the hit determination is a hit, the hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal figure. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination is a loss, the lost normal map is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the normal map. The winning probability can be changed as appropriate.

3-1-2. Normal map fluctuation pattern determination / normal map variable display The normal map fluctuation pattern determination is a judgment for determining a normal map fluctuation pattern using, for example, a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9B. The normal map fluctuation pattern is identification information related to predetermined items related to the variable display of the normal map such as the normal map fluctuation time.

The normal figure fluctuation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state), the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table includes the normal map fluctuation pattern determination table (non-time saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table) and the time saving used in the non-time saving state. There is a normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table (time saving normal map fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the state.

In each normal map fluctuation pattern determination table, one normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, is stored for each normal map to be stopped. That is, the pachinko gaming machine PY can make the fluctuation time of the normal map different between the non-time saving state and the time saving state. For example, in the non-time saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map (lost normal map) is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds, and the winning symbol is set. The variable display of the normal map when the stop display is performed is determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 30 seconds. In addition, in the time-saving state, the variable display of the normal map when the lost normal map is stopped and displayed is determined to be the normal map fluctuation pattern in which the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds, and the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. For the variable display of, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined so that the normal map fluctuation time is 5 seconds. It should be noted that these fluctuation times of the normal map can be changed as appropriate.

Then, the variable display of the normal map variation time associated with the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by the normal map fluctuation pattern determination is performed by the normal map display 82. By performing the hit determination and the normal map fluctuation pattern determination in this way, the normal map display 82 performs variable display of the normal map.

3-1-3. Auxiliary game Auxiliary game is a variable display of a normal map, and is executed when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) as a display result (result of the general map lottery). In the auxiliary game, the electric chew 12D opens

The elements constituting the auxiliary game (auxiliary game component) include various elements such as the number of times the electric chew 12D is opened and the opening time for each opening. The pachinko gaming machine PY controls the auxiliary game by using the auxiliary game control table. Auxiliary game components are stored in the auxiliary game control table. For example, as shown in FIG. 9C, it is possible to associate a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) with the auxiliary game control table. That is, it is possible to associate the auxiliary game component with the game state (non-time saving state / time saving state). The specific contents of each element such as the number of times of opening and the opening time can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY can make the opening time of the electric chew 12D different between the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state and the auxiliary game in the time saving state. For example, in the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is opened only for the first opening time in which it is difficult to make the electric chew 12D win a game ball such as 0.2 seconds. On the other hand, in the auxiliary game in the time-saving state, the game ball is won a prize in the electric chew 12D, for example, longer than the first opening time such as opening twice for 2.5 seconds with an interval (closing) of 1.0 second. The electric chew 12D is opened only for the second opening time, which is easy to make.

In the following, the auxiliary game in the non-time saving state is also referred to as "short open auxiliary game". On the other hand, the auxiliary game in the short time state is also called "long open auxiliary game". Further, the opening time in each auxiliary game is the total time in the auxiliary game, and is opened a plurality of times in one auxiliary game, for example, opening once and then opening again with an interval of closing once. It may be configured as follows.

3-2. Games related to special figures Next, games related to special figures will be explained. The pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 1 lottery when the launched gaming ball wins the first starting port 11. When the special figure 1 lottery is performed, the special figure 1 display 81a performs a variable display of the special figure 1 (a stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 1 lottery. Here, the special figure 1 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 1 lottery has a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. In addition, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the prize is terminated.

Similarly, the pachinko gaming machine PY can execute the special figure 2 lottery when the launched gaming ball wins the second starting port 12. When the special figure 2 lottery is performed, the special figure 2 display 81b performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (a stop display after performing a variable display) to notify the result of the special figure 2 lottery. Here, the special figure 2 that is stopped and displayed includes a jackpot symbol and a lost symbol. That is, the result of the special figure 2 lottery includes a big hit and a loss.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is executed, a new game state is set, and the game based on the winning is completed. Further, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not performed, and the game based on the prize is ended.

Further, in the following, winning a game ball in the first starting opening 11 is referred to as "establishment of the first starting condition", and winning a prize in the second starting opening 12 is "establishment of the second starting condition". That is. Further, "establishment of the first starting condition" and "establishment of the second starting condition" are collectively referred to as "establishment of the starting condition". In addition, the lost symbol of the special symbol is also referred to as a "missing special symbol" in order to distinguish it from the above-mentioned lost symbol of the normal diagram.

The pachinko gaming machine PY performs a series of games such as a special figure lottery, a variable display of a special figure, and a big hit game by satisfying the starting condition and acquiring the special figure-related determination information. Then, in order to perform variable display of the special figure, various judgments are made on the special figure-related determination information. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special symbol-related determination information to be acquired includes a special symbol random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a reach random number, and a special symbol variation pattern random number.

The special symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for making a jackpot judgment. The jackpot symbol random number is a random number (judgment information) for determining the jackpot symbol type. The reach random number is a random number (judgment information) for performing reach determination. The special symbol variation pattern random number is a random number (determination information) for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol. A range is appropriately provided for each random number. Next, each determination made using the special figure-related determination information will be described.

3-2-1. Jackpot determination The jackpot determination is to determine whether or not a jackpot (whether or not to execute a jackpot game), in other words, either a jackpot or a loss, using the jackpot determination table. As shown in FIGS. 10A to 10F, for example, the jackpot determination table can be provided for each set value. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot determination table with the set value.

The set value is a value such as a parameter associated with the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot determination (hereinafter, also referred to as "big hit probability"). As will be described later, the set value can be set when the power of the game control board 100 is turned on. By operating the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 described above, the set value can be set for each pachinko gaming machine PY.

In the basic embodiment, six types of setting values 1 to 6 are set. Specifically, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "1", a jackpot determination table used when the set value is "2", and a set value of "3". The jackpot judgment table used at the time, the jackpot judgment table used when the set value is "4", the jackpot judgment table used when the set value is "5", and the jackpot judgment table used when the set value is "6". There is a jackpot determination table used.

Further, each of the jackpot determination tables associated with the set value includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (hereinafter referred to as "normal probability jackpot determination table") and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state. (Hereinafter, it is referred to as "high probability jackpot judgment table"). The type of set value is not limited to the basic embodiment and can be set as appropriate.

In each jackpot determination table associated with the set value and the game state, the determination value of the special symbol random number (special symbol random number determination value) is distributed to the jackpot and the loss which are the results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired special symbol random numbers with the jackpot determination table associated with the set value and the gaming state, and determines whether it is a jackpot or a loss. As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) to 10 (F), for each set value, the special symbol random number judgment value in which the high-probability jackpot determination table is determined to be a jackpot is higher than the normal probability jackpot determination table. Is set a lot. Further, for the same game state, as the set value becomes higher, more special symbol random number determination values determined to be big hits are set. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to determine that it is a big hit.

It is possible to appropriately change the method of allocating the special symbol random number determination value to the jackpot probability and the determination results of various jackpot determinations.

3-2-2. Jackpot symbol type determination In the jackpot symbol type determination, when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, for example, the jackpot symbol type (big hit symbol type) is determined using the jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in FIG. 11 (A). It is to be. It is possible to associate the jackpot symbol type with the jackpot content, in other words, the jackpot component (content advantageous to the player) composed of the game privilege given to the player.

In the jackpot symbol type determination table, the type of special symbol that is variably displayed (special figure 1 / special figure 2), in other words, the prize is awarded due to the jackpot symbol type determination (causing the jackpot symbol type determination). It is associated with the type of starting port (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed and the jackpot used when the variable display of the special figure 2 is performed. There is a symbol type determination table (second big hit symbol type determination table).

Multiple types of jackpot symbols can be set. In each jackpot symbol type determination table, the determination value of the jackpot symbol type random number (the jackpot symbol type random number determination value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type which is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired jackpot symbol type random numbers with the jackpot symbol type determination table to determine the type of jackpot symbol. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols.

The type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 and the type of the jackpot symbol of the special figure 2 can be appropriately set. For example, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11A, the jackpot symbol of the special figure 1 is used. As a jackpot symbol A, a jackpot symbol B, and a jackpot symbol C, three types of jackpot symbols are provided, and as a jackpot symbol of special figure 2, three types of jackpot symbols D, a jackpot symbol E, and a jackpot symbol F are used. Can be provided. Then, as in the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 11A, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number determination values are appropriately distributed to various jackpot symbols. ing. The distribution rate for each jackpot symbol type can be changed as appropriate. In addition, the types of jackpot symbols can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

3-2-3. Reach determination In the reach determination, for example, when the result of the jackpot determination is a loss, whether or not to generate reach by the special figure variation effect described later is determined by using the reach determination table as shown in FIG. 11 (B). It is to decide.

The reach determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). When associated with the gaming state, for example, the reach determination table includes a reach determination table (non-time reduction reach determination table) used in the non-time reduction state and a reach determination table (time reduction reach) used in the non-time reduction state. Judgment table).

In each reach judgment table, the judgment value of the reach random number (reach random number judgment value) is divided into "with reach (generate reach)" and "without reach (do not generate reach)" which are the results of reach judgment. There is. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY collates the acquired reach random numbers with the reach determination table, and determines whether or not there is reach (whether or not to generate reach).

As shown in FIG. 11B, it is possible to make the number of reach random number determination values determined to be "reachable (generate reach)" different between the non-time reduction reach determination table and the time reduction reach determination table. It is possible. In the following, the result of the reach judgment "with reach (generate reach)" performed on the premise that the result of the jackpot judgment is "miss" is referred to as "loss with reach", and "without reach (without reach). "Does not generate reach)" is sometimes referred to as "loss without reach".

3-2-4. Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment In the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment, regardless of whether the result of the jackpot judgment is a big hit or a loss, for example, a fluctuation pattern judgment table of a special symbol as shown in FIGS. 12 to 13 (special figure fluctuation pattern). The determination table) is used to determine the variation pattern (special map variation pattern) of the variable display of the special map.

The special figure fluctuation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items related to a special figure fluctuation time, a so-called “scale”, an effect flow (effect content) of a special figure variation effect described later, and the like. It should be noted that the special map fluctuation pattern can include identification information regarding the result of the jackpot determination and the result of the reach determination, in addition to the special map variation time and the effect flow (effect content) of the special map variation effect. The type and number of special figure fluctuation patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table is the type of special symbol (special figure 1 / special figure 2) that performs variable display to be judged, in other words, the starting port where a prize is given due to the special figure fluctuation pattern judgment. It can be associated with the type (first starting port 11 / second starting port 12). That is, in the special figure variation pattern determination table, the special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 1 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 12) used when performing the variable display of the special figure 1 and the variable display of the special figure 2 are displayed. There is a special figure variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table: FIG. 13) used at the time of the operation.

Then, each special figure variation pattern determination table can be associated with a gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state). Specifically, the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table is used in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for time saving). On the other hand, similarly, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table is also used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table (non-time saving special figure 2 fluctuation pattern judgment table) used in the non-time saving state and in the time saving state. There is a special figure 2 variation pattern determination table (special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for time saving).

Further, each special figure variation pattern determination table associated with the gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) can be further associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table have a jackpot use, a reach loss, and a reachless loss, respectively. Similarly, the non-time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table and the time saving special figure 2 variation pattern determination table also have a jackpot, a reach loss, and a non-reach loss, respectively.

Further, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 1 hold number. For example, it is used when the special figure 1 holding number (U1) is 0 to 2 and the special drawing 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach is used, and when the special drawing 1 holding number (U1) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern judgment table for loss without reach. Similarly, the special figure 2 variation pattern determination table for each reachless loss associated with the gaming state can also be associated with the special figure 2 hold number. Specifically, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach used when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 0 to 2, and the special figure 2 hold number (U2) when the special figure 2 hold number (U2) is 3 to 4. There is a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach, which is used in the above.

Then, the special map display 81 performs the variation display of the special map variation time according to the special map variation pattern determined by each special map variation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result of the special symbol variable display (result of the special symbol lottery) after the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and subsequently. , The jackpot game is executed.

Further, it is possible to associate each special figure variation pattern with an effect flow of the special figure variation effect as shown in the third column from the right in the table of FIGS. 12 to 13. Here, a typical effect constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect associated with the special figure variation pattern will be described.

There are normal fluctuation, reach, normal reach (N reach), long reach (L reach), special reach (SP reach), and battle production as the effects that make up the effect flow of the special figure variation effect.

The normal fluctuation suggests that the staging symbols that had been stopped and displayed started to fluctuate, and each of the staging symbols constituting each staging symbol was fluctuated at a high speed to the extent that it was difficult to recognize, and the variable display of the special symbol was started. It is a production to do. Then, the special figure fluctuation effect (the part from the start of the change of the effect symbol to the stop of the change) related to the loss change without reach and the part until the reach is established (determined) in the special figure change effect where the reach occurs are normal fluctuations. May consist of.

Immediately after the reach is established (determined) through normal fluctuation, the N reach is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) at the position where, for example, the effect symbols constituting the reach are temporarily stopped, and the remaining one. This is a production in which the design slows down and fluctuates at a lower speed than normal fluctuation. The jackpot expectation suggested by N reach is higher than normal fluctuations and lower than L reach and SP reach, which will be described later. When the special symbol variation effect ends at N reach, the remaining one effect symbol that fluctuates at the low speed stops. In the case of loss, the remaining one staging symbol stops at a staging symbol different from the staging symbol constituting the reach. If the special symbol variation effect does not end in N reach, the remaining one effect symbol changes at high speed again, and develops (switches) from N reach to L reach and SP reach while the reach is maintained.

L-reach is an effect that can be executed at the time of a big hit and a loss, and suggests whether or not the big hit game state is reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of the big hit game state. Further, the L reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the N reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the N reach. Even in the L reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the background image dedicated to the L reach (the image dedicated to the L reach is played). In L reach, an animation image by 2DCG is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. As the production content of L reach, a video of a scene different from the game related to SP reach, which will be described later, is displayed, such as the main character performing special training to learn a special move.

The SP reach can be executed at the time of a big hit or a loss, and is an effect suggesting whether or not the big hit game state is reached, and suggests that there is a possibility of the big hit game state. Furthermore, the SP reach is, for example, an effect that can be performed after the N reach, which is performed for a longer time than the L reach, and suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the L reach. Even in the SP reach, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced, and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 described later) that does not interfere with the background image is smaller than that in the N reach. At the upper left of the display unit 50a, the right effect symbol EZ3 is moved to the upper right of the display unit 50a), and the background image is switched to the SP reach-dedicated background image (the SP reach-dedicated image is played). In the SP reach, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a. Then, as the production content of the SP reach, a video of a scene in which the team to which the hero character belongs and the team to which the rivals of the hero character belong play a match is displayed.

The battle effect is, for example, an effect that can be executed after reaching in a short time state, and is an effect that suggests that the jackpot expectation is higher than the normal fluctuation. Even in the battle effect, the established reach is maintained, but the effect symbols constituting the reach are reduced and the predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the display unit 50a). In the state of moving to the upper right of), it switches to the background image dedicated to the battle production (the video dedicated to the battle production is played). Further, in the battle effect, the 3DCG image is mainly displayed on the display unit 50a.

In addition, in the "state in which the reach is maintained" in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production, the effect symbols constituting the reach in the N reach, the L reach, the SP reach, and the battle production are displayed in the display unit 50a. Not only the state in which the image is visible in the display unit 50a, but also the state in which the effect symbol constituting the reach is difficult to see or cannot be visually recognized from the display unit 50a for a predetermined period, for example, in relation to the dedicated background image. In addition, the production contents of normal fluctuation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect can be changed as appropriate. Further, the effects constituting the special figure variation effect are not limited to these, and can be added or reduced as appropriate.

Further, as shown in the second column from the right of the table of FIGS. 12 to 13, it is possible to give a name to the special figure fluctuation pattern by associating the jackpot determination result and the effect content of the special figure fluctuation effect. .. The special map fluctuation pattern related to the jackpot may be collectively referred to as "big hit fluctuation", and the special map fluctuation pattern related to the loss may be collectively referred to as "loss variation".

Furthermore, the special map fluctuation pattern in which SP reach is performed regardless of the jackpot judgment result is "SP reach variation", the special map fluctuation pattern in which L reach is performed is "L reach variation", and the special map variation in N reach. The special figure fluctuation pattern at which the production ends is sometimes collectively referred to as "N reach fluctuation". In addition, the loss fluctuation with reach is referred to as "loss fluctuation with reach", and the loss fluctuation without reach may be collectively referred to as "normal loss fluctuation".

3-2-5. Look-ahead judgment The pachinko gaming machine PY can make a look-ahead judgment using, for example, a look-ahead judgment table as shown in FIGS. 14 to 15 based on the acquired special figure-related judgment information before making a jackpot judgment. be. The look-ahead determination table is the type of start port (first start port 11 / second start port 12) related to the start prize, in other words, the type of special figure variably displayed by the start prize (special figure 1 / special figure). It is possible to relate to 2). That is, in the look-ahead determination table, the first look-ahead determination table (FIG. 14) in the case where the first start opening 11 is won and the variable display of the special figure 1 is performed, and the second start opening 12 is won, and the special figure is shown. There is a second look-ahead determination table (FIG. 15) when the variable display of 2 is performed. The look-ahead determination performed based on the first look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "first look-ahead determination", and the look-ahead determination performed based on the second look-ahead determination table is also referred to as "second look-ahead determination".

Further, the look-ahead determination table can also be associated with a gaming state (normal gaming state / high-probability high-base gaming state / low-probability high-base gaming state) described later. That is, the look-ahead judgment table includes a look-ahead judgment table (a look-ahead judgment table for a normal game state) used in a normal gaming state and a look-ahead judgment table (a high-probability high-base game) used in a high-probability high-base game state. There is a pre-reading determination table for a state) and a pre-reading determination table (a pre-reading determination table for a low-probability high-base gaming state) used in a low-probability high-based gaming state.

That is, the look-ahead determination table includes a first look-ahead determination table used in a normal gaming state, a first look-ahead determination table used in a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a low-probability high-base gaming state. The first look-ahead determination table used, the second look-ahead determination table used in the normal gaming state, the second look-ahead determination table used in the high-probability high-base gaming state, and the low-probability high-base gaming state. There is a second look-ahead determination table used in.

By the look-ahead determination using the look-ahead determination table shown in FIGS. 14 to 15, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure performed by winning the starting ports 11 and 12 is specified. That is, the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the variable display of the special figure is specified as the look-ahead determination result before the variable display of the special figure based on the prize is performed. In the process of specifying the special figure fluctuation pattern, the success or failure of the jackpot is also specified as the look-ahead determination result. If "big hit" is specified in the look-ahead determination, the jackpot symbol type is also specified as the look-ahead determination result. When the pre-reading determination table is used to specify the success or failure of the jackpot, the special symbol random number determination value corresponding to the set set value is used.

Then, the look-ahead determination result including the information about the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like is associated with the start winning command. As will be described later, the start winning command is transmitted to the staging control board 120 as a look-ahead determination result along with the generation thereof. It should be noted that what kind of information is specified as the look-ahead determination result can be appropriately changed.

As described above, the special figure display 81 performs variable display of the special figure by performing the big hit determination, the big hit symbol type determination, the reach determination, and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination. Then, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the display result (result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not performed, and the jackpot game is subsequently executed. Next, the jackpot game will be described.

3-3. Big hit game The big hit game consists of multiple round games that involve the opening and closing of the big winning opening 14, the opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the big hit game to the start of the first round game, and the final round. It includes the ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the round game to the end of the jackpot game. Each round game begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game or the start of the ending.

It is possible not to provide OP or ED. Further, in the following, the round game of a predetermined number of times (predetermined order) is simply referred to as a "round". For example, the first round game is also referred to as "1 round (1R)", and the 10th round game is also referred to as "10 round (10R)".

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY controls the jackpot game by using the jackpot game control table. The jackpot game control table can be set for each type of jackpot symbol. That is, it is possible to associate the jackpot game with the type of jackpot symbol. And one kind or a plurality of kinds of jackpot games can be set.

The jackpot game control table stores elements constituting the jackpot game (big hit game components). The jackpot game components include the number of round games, the number of times the big prize opening 14 is opened in each round game, the type and opening time (opening pattern) of the big winning opening where each opening is performed, and the time to close until the next opening. (Closed time), opening time (opening time), ending time (ending time), etc. are included.

Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can control the jackpot game by using, for example, the jackpot game control table as shown in FIG. 16 (A). That is, it is possible to set the type of the jackpot game and the jackpot game component for each jackpot game as shown in FIG. 16A. Here, the jackpot game set in FIG. 16A will be described.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol A (hereinafter, also referred to as "first jackpot game"), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the first big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the first big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol B (hereinafter, also referred to as “second jackpot game”), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the second big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the second big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol C (hereinafter, also referred to as "third jackpot game"), a round game is performed five times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 5R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the third big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 15.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the third big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol D (hereinafter, also referred to as “fourth jackpot game”), a round game is performed 10 times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 10R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fourth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fourth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol E (hereinafter, also referred to as "fifth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the fifth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the closed state of the big winning opening 14 is maintained for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the fifth big hit game.

In the jackpot game associated with the jackpot symbol F (hereinafter, also referred to as "sixth jackpot game"), a round game is performed six times. Then, in each round game from 1R to 6R, the big winning opening 14 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per round game. In addition, there is an opening in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the start of the sixth big hit game to the start of the first round game. Further, there is an ending in which the big winning opening 14 is kept closed for 10.0 seconds from the end of the last round game to the end of the sixth big hit game.

In each round game, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a, even before the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 14 has elapsed, it is large. The winning opening 14 is closed and the round game ends. In addition, the types and specific contents of the jackpot game components can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the jackpot game control table shown in FIG. 16A, which type of jackpot game is executed is determined by the type of jackpot symbol, but the jackpot game is executed by a method different from this. You may do so. For example, a device capable of distributing to two winning openings is provided in the game area 6, and if one winning opening is won, only a jackpot game consisting of a predetermined number of round games is executed, while if the other winning opening is won, a predetermined number is specified. Either a jackpot game consisting of more than a number of round games or a jackpot game consisting of less than a predetermined number of round games may be executed with a predetermined probability by a lottery or the like.

3-4. Game state Next, a game state in which the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY has a jackpot game state in which the jackpot game is executed and a non-big hit game state in which the jackpot game is not executed. The non-big hit game state includes a normal game state, which is a basic base game state, and a specific game state, which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. Factors that are "advantageous to the player" related to this specific gaming state include the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12. That is, the jackpot probability and the ease of opening the second starting port 12 can be associated with the specific gaming state.

Regarding the jackpot probability, the advantage to the player is that the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state, and it becomes easier to win the jackpot. Further, regarding the ease of opening the second starting port 12, the advantage to the player is that the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is higher than in the normal gaming state, and the opening of the second starting port 12 per unit time is higher. It means that the time will be longer.

As the specific gaming state, the first specific gaming state in which both the jackpot probability and the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 are advantageous to the player, and the second specific gaming state in which only the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player. It is possible to set three types of a specific gaming state and a third specific gaming state in which only the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 is advantageous to the player. It is also possible to mount a part of the three types of specific gaming states without mounting all of these three types of specific gaming states on the pachinko gaming machine PY.

Here, as a partial gaming state focusing on the jackpot probability, a state in which the jackpot probability is higher than that in the normal gaming state and the jackpot probability is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "high probability state". On the other hand, the jackpot probability is the normal probability in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the jackpot probability is not advantageous to the player is called the "normal probability state".

Further, as a partial gaming state focusing on the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is longer than that of the normal gaming state, and the second starting port 12 A state in which the ease of opening (the ease of opening the second starting port 12) is advantageous to the player is referred to as a "time saving state". On the other hand, the opening time of the second starting port 12 per unit time is the opening time in the normal gaming state, and the state in which the ease of opening the second starting port 12 is not advantageous to the player is "non-time saving". It is called "state".

Here, the non-time saving state and the time saving state will be described in detail. As described above, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time is longer than in the non-time saving state. That is, the time saving state is a state in which the second starting port 12 is more likely to win a prize than the non-time saving state. Here, a specific method for making it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state will be described.

For example, by setting the time-reduced state to a state in which the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be shorter than that of the non-time-reduced state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-reduced state. For example, as described above, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the normal map fluctuation time (5.0 seconds) shorter than the normal map fluctuation time (30.0 seconds) determined in the non-time saving state is set in the time-shortened state. Let it be decided. As a result, the number of times the general drawing lottery is executed per unit time is larger in the time-saving state. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit determination and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game are the same, the general drawing lottery per unit time is performed. As the number of executions increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer.

Further, by setting the time saving state to a state in which the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be longer than that in the non-time saving state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time saving state. .. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the electric chew 12D is released for 0.2 seconds in one auxiliary game, whereas in the time saving state, the electric chew 12D is 5.0 in total in one auxiliary game. Try to open for seconds. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the probability of winning in the hit judgment and the normal figure fluctuation time are the same, the number of times the auxiliary game is executed per unit time becomes the same, so once. Since the opening time of the electric chew 12D in the auxiliary game is long, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

Further, by setting the time-reduced state to a state in which it is easier to determine that the hit is a hit than in the non-time-reduced state, it is possible to make it easier for the second starting port 12 to win a prize in the time-reduced state. For example, as described above, in the non-time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 6600/65536, whereas in the time saving state, the hit determination is determined to be a hit with a probability of 59936/65536. .. In this case, regardless of the difference between the non-time saving state and the time saving state, if the opening time of the electric chew 12D and the fluctuation time of the normal figure in one auxiliary game are the same, there is a high probability that the hit determination will determine a hit. Since the number of hit determinations per unit time increases, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes long.

As described above, the factors constituting the ease of opening in the time-saving state include the probability of winning in the hit determination (winning probability), the fluctuation time of the normal map, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game. .. In the time-saving state, it is easier to win than in the non-time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal figure is likely to be short, and the opening time of the electric chew 12D in one auxiliary game is likely to be long. When the condition is satisfied, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state, and it is possible to easily win a prize in the second starting port 12. As a result, the so-called "base", which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired balls, becomes high. Therefore, in a short time state with a high base, it is possible to aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls possessed compared to the normal game state. That is, it can be said that the time-saving state is more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

In the time saving state, not all three conditions for increasing the opening time per unit time of the second starting port 12 may be satisfied, but only a part of the conditions may be satisfied. Finally, in the time-reduced state, the opening time of the electric chew 12D per unit time becomes longer than in the non-time-reduced state, and it is sufficient that the second starting port 12 can be easily won.

In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of executions of the special figure variable display per unit time is small or special by making it easier to select a special figure fluctuation pattern having a shorter special figure fluctuation time than in the non-time saving state. The average of the fluctuation times may be set to be low. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace at which the special figure hold is digested becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be stored as a special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a big hit with the smooth progress of the game.

In the following, the first specific game state is referred to as a "high probability high base game state", and the second specific game state is referred to as a "high probability low" in relation to the content of the advantage to the player for each specific game state. The "base game state" and the third specific game state are also referred to as "low probability high base game state". Further, the normal gaming state is also referred to as a "low probability low base gaming state".

Therefore, it can be said that the low-probability low-base gaming state is a gaming state controlled in a normal probability state and a non-time saving state. Similarly, the low-probability high-base gaming state is controlled in the normal probability state and time-saving state, the high-probability low-base gaming state is controlled in the high-probability state and non-time-saving state, and the high-probability high-base gaming state is controlled in the high-probability state and time-saving state. It can be said that the game is in a state of being.

As described above, the pachinko gaming machine PY can be controlled in a low-probability low-base gaming state, a low-probability high-base gaming state, a high-probability low-base gaming state, a high-probability high-base gaming state, and a jackpot gaming state. In the big hit game state, the big winning opening 14 is open for a long time and a large amount of game balls can be acquired. Therefore, the big hit game state can be said to be an advantageous game state for the player. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state and the specific gaming state can be said to be "advantageous gaming states" that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

The high-probability high-base game state and the high-probability low-base game state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base game state in that the jackpot probability is higher than the normal probability state. be. Further, the high-probability high-base gaming state and the low-probability high-base gaming state are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low-base gaming state in that the ease of winning the second starting port 12 is higher than the non-time saving state. It is in a gaming state. Furthermore, in the jackpot game state, the first start opening 11 and the big prize opening 14 in which the number of prize balls by one winning is larger than the second start opening 12 are opened, so that the jackpot game state is a low probability low base game. It is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the state.

Further, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on, the normal gaming state is set first. In addition, the jackpot game state is set by displaying the stop of the jackpot symbol. On the other hand, the specific game state is set by winning the big hit and executing the big hit game. Next, the setting of the specific gaming state will be described.

3-5. Setting of specific gaming state The pachinko gaming machine PY can newly set a specific gaming state with the end of the jackpot game. That is, after the jackpot game, the game can be controlled and advanced in a specific game state. The duration of this specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. For example, the specific game state can be continued until the next big hit is won. It is also possible to limit the period during which the specific gaming state can be continued.

When limiting the duration of the specific gaming state, the specific gaming state can be terminated when the termination condition for the continuation period is satisfied. Then, when the specific gaming state ends, the normal gaming state can be set. Further, regarding the high-probability high-base gaming state, when the end condition is satisfied, the low-probability high-base gaming state or the high-probability low-base gaming state can be set. In this case, the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state may be continued until the next big hit is won. Further, the same or different end conditions may be set for the newly set low-probability high-base gaming state or high-probability low-base gaming state, and when the end condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state may be set.

In addition, the end condition for the duration of the specific gaming state can be set as appropriate. As the end condition, for example, the number of executions of the variable display of the special figure can be set. In addition, the number of times the special figure variable display is executed is not limited to the elapsed time after the big hit game, the number of launched balls of the game ball after the big hit game, the number of passages to the gate 13 after the big hit game, or whether to end the specific game state. It is possible to set the end condition to derive the result of ending in the lottery (so-called "fall lottery"). Further, these elements may be set individually as the end condition, or may be set in combination.

In addition, these end conditions may be set to be the same for all the specific game states that can be set after the big hit game, and may be set for some of the specific game states that can be set. You may. Further, the end condition may be different for each specific game state.

Further, the specific game state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition can be associated with the jackpot symbol type related to the jackpot game. For example, when the jackpot symbol type is set as described above, as shown in FIG. 16B, a high-probability high-base game is performed after the jackpot game related to the jackpot symbol A, the jackpot symbol B, and the jackpot symbol D is completed. The game may be controlled in the state. Here, this high-probability, high-base game state can be continued until the jackpot is won without setting an end condition. Further, the game may be controlled in a low probability and high base game state after the end of the big hit game related to the big hit symbol C and the big hit symbol E. Here, an end condition can be set for this low-probability high-base game state, and the special figure variable display can be set 100 times as the end condition. The relationship between the jackpot type symbol and the specific gaming state controlled after the jackpot game, the presence / absence of the end condition, and the content of the end condition is an example, and is not limited to this.

In addition, paying attention to the game profit of the big hit, the big hit in which the game progresses in a high probability state after the big hit game is also called "high probability big hit". Further, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a high probability state and a short time state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "probability change jackpot". In addition, a jackpot in which the game progresses in a normal probability state and a time-saving state after the jackpot game is also referred to as a "time-saving jackpot".

4. Main production by the gaming machine Next, the main production performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 33.

4-1. Production mode First, the production mode will be described. The staging mode is a division of staging (or a higher-level conceptual attribute). The pachinko gaming machine PY can set a customer waiting effect mode, a normal effect mode, a probability variation effect mode, a time saving effect mode, and a jackpot effect mode as the effect mode.

In the customer waiting effect mode, the special figure variable display is performed in "low probability low base game state", "low probability high base game state", "high probability low base game state" and "high probability high base game state". This is an effect mode that can be set when there is no special figure and indicates that the standby state is in which the variable display of the special figure is not performed. The customer waiting effect is performed when the customer waiting effect mode is set. In the customer waiting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY is displayed on the display unit 50a. Further, when the first effect button 40k is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 17B, the setting screen G101 for setting the effect of the pachinko gaming machine PY. Is displayed. The settings related to the effect include a volume setting of the sound output from the speaker 52, a brightness setting of the display unit 50a, a frequency setting of the effect to be executed, and the like. It should be noted that the setting items related to the effect can be appropriately set. It is also possible to prevent the setting screen G101 from being displayed by the player's operation from the customer waiting demo video G100.

The normal effect mode can be set in the "low probability low base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the game is in the normal game state. Further, a plurality of lower-level effect modes belonging to the normal effect mode can be provided. For example, as the lower hierarchy effect mode belonging to the normal effect mode, a first normal effect mode, a second normal effect mode, a third normal effect mode, and the like can be provided.

In the following, the production mode of the lower hierarchy belonging to the production mode is also referred to as a “production stage”. Along with this, the first normal production mode is also referred to as the "first normal production stage", the second normal production mode is also referred to as the "second normal production stage", and the third normal production mode is also referred to as the "third normal production stage". Say. Unless there are special circumstances, basically, the effect mode set when the special figure variation display is first started after the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on is the first normal effect stage ( It is assumed that it is the first normal effect mode). However, the type of the effect mode initially set is not particularly limited and may be changed as appropriate.

When a plurality of production stages belonging to the normal production mode are provided in this way, the production stages can be repeatedly switched in order when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. The switching condition can be set as appropriate, but for example, the switching condition can be set so that the special figure variable effect is performed a predetermined number of times without winning the jackpot. Further, as the switching condition, it is possible to set that a specific effect such as a special figure variation effect based on the SP reach loss variation is executed.

In addition, as will be described later, a reach may occur in the special figure variation effect, but the special figure variation effect is established for the entire section of the special figure variation effect when the reach does not occur, and the reach when the reach occurs. It can be divided into a front part before the reach and a rear part after the reach is established when the reach occurs. The front part is composed of the above-mentioned "normal fluctuation".

Then, in the front stage portion of the first normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18 (A): first normal background image G111) mainly representing the scenery of the city is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front stage portion of the second normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18 (B): second normal background image G112) mainly representing the ground of the baseball field is displayed on the display unit 50a. In the front stage portion of the third normal effect stage, a background image (FIG. 18 (C): third normal background image G113) mainly showing the inside of the restaurant is displayed on the display unit 50a. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and the normal effect mode is used. A dedicated background image is displayed according to the type of reach.

The dedicated background image according to the type of reach in the normal effect mode may be a background image common to the normal effect mode regardless of the type of the effect stage, or may be a different background image for each effect stage.

Further, the normal effect mode may be set even in the "high probability low base game state", and the normal effect mode may be set to the effect mode indicating that the non-time saving state is set. Alternatively, a predetermined effect mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" and is different from the normal effect mode may be provided. Further, in the low-probability low-base gaming state and the high-probability low-base gaming state that occur under certain conditions, a predetermined staging mode different from the normal staging mode may be set.

The probability variation effect mode can be set in the "high probability high base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the state is a high probability high base game state. In the pre-stage portion of the probability variation effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18D, a background image (probability variation background image G120) representing the universe is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the probability variation BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the probabilistic effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the probabilistic effect mode is displayed.

The time-saving effect mode can be set in the "low-probability high-base game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the time-saving effect state is set. In the front part of the time saving effect mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 18E, a background image representing the sky (time saving background image G130) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and the time saving BGM is output from the speaker 52. .. Further, in the latter part of the time saving effect mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach in the time saving effect mode is displayed.

The time saving effect mode is set in the low probability high base game state and the high probability high base game state, and is either the low probability high base game state or the high probability high base game state, and is at least the time saving state. It is also possible to set the effect mode to indicate that.

Further, for either or either of the probabilistic effect mode and the time-saving effect mode, a plurality of effect stages for the effect mode are further provided as in the normal effect mode, and the effect stage is switched when a predetermined switching condition is satisfied. You can do it.

The jackpot effect mode is an effect mode that can be set when the jackpot game is being performed in the "big hit game state", and is an effect mode indicating that the jackpot game is being performed. In the jackpot effect mode, for example, during the opening in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19A, the opening image G1 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and the right-handed image G2 prompting “right-handed” are displayed on the display unit 50a. Is displayed. The jackpot opening effect is performed. In addition, during the opening, as a jackpot opening effect, a background image (opening background image G200) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed in the background of the opening image G1 and the right-handed image G2 on the display unit 50a. ..

Further, in the jackpot effect mode, during the round game in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19B, the right-handed image G2 is continuously displayed from the opening on the display unit 50a, and the round image showing the number of rounds is displayed. A round effect is performed in which the prize ball number image G4 suggesting the G3 and the number of prize balls paid out is displayed. In addition, during the round game, as a round effect, the background of the right-handed image G2, the round image G3, and the prize ball number image G4 on the display unit 50a is a background image (background for the round) according to the type of the jackpot game. The image G201) is displayed, and the BGM corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is output from the speaker 52.

Further, during the ending in the jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 19C, the display unit 50a suggests the ending image G5 suggesting the effect mode set after the jackpot game and the total number of prize balls paid out. The jackpot ending effect in which the total prize ball number image G6 is displayed is performed. In addition, during the ending, as a jackpot ending effect, a background image (ending background image G202) corresponding to the type of the jackpot game is displayed on the display unit 50a in the background of the ending image G5 and the total prize ball number image G6. Will be done.

In the following, the jackpot opening effect, the round effect, and the jackpot ending effect are collectively referred to as a "big hit game effect" as an effect performed in the jackpot game. That is, the jackpot game effect is performed in the jackpot effect mode.

4-2. Special figure fluctuation effect Next, the special figure variation effect will be described. When the variable display of the special figure is started, the pachinko gaming machine PY has the special figure fluctuation pattern and the special figure lottery result (big hit judgment result, big hit symbol type judgment result, reach judgment result, and The special figure fluctuation effect is executed based on the special figure fluctuation pattern determination result) and the like.

In the special figure variation effect, the display unit 50a superimposes the variation display of the effect symbol on the predetermined background image. In the variable display of the staging symbol, the staging symbol stops after the staging symbol fluctuates. That is, after the special symbol fluctuation time and the variation display of the staging symbol are performed, the variation is stopped and the staging symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, basically, the result of the special figure lottery is notified by the stop display of the effect symbol.

In the special figure variation effect performed by the display unit 50a, it is possible to use an image other than the variation display of the effect symbol. Further, in addition to the image display device 50 including the display unit 50a, various effect devices such as a speaker 52, a frame lamp 53, a panel movable device 55, a first effect button device 40, and a second effect button device 41 are used. It is possible to perform a figure variation effect.

Next, in the special figure variation effect executed in response to the special figure variable display, the effect symbol displayed on the display unit 50a will be described. The staging symbol is also identification information for showing the result of the special drawing lottery, and a plurality of types are provided. In detail, one of the constituent elements of the staging symbol constitutes identification information for showing the special figure lottery result, and a plurality of types of staging symbols are provided depending on the difference in the identification information.

For example, as shown in FIG. 20 (A), the effect symbols may be composed of numbers 1 to 9, and nine effect symbols may be provided. Then, the effect symbol including the number "1" is referred to as the effect symbol G10a. Similarly, the staging symbols including the numbers "2" to "9" are referred to as the staging symbols G10b to the staging symbols G10e. For convenience, when individual staging symbols are handled without distinction, they are collectively referred to as "staging symbol G10".

In addition, the numerical parts of the effect symbols G10c and G10g related to "3" and "7" are red, and "1", "2", "4", "5", "6", "8", and The numerical portions of the effect symbols G10a, G10b, G10d, G10e, G10f, G10h, and G10i of "9" are blue. That is, colors are included in the components of the effect symbol G10. The configuration of the effect symbol G10 and what the identification information is set to may be appropriately changed. For example, other components such as a character associated with each number may be added to the effect symbol G10.

Subsequently, the effect symbol display area for displaying the effect symbol G10 will be described. For example, as shown in FIG. 20B, the left side, the center, and the right side of the display unit 50a divided into three substantially evenly in the horizontal direction are the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol. The region can be 50b3. The effect symbol G10 is displayed in any of the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3.

Then, mainly, in the front stage portion of the special symbol variation effect, the effect symbol G10 displayed in the left effect symbol area 50b1 is collectively referred to as "left effect symbol EZ1", and the effect symbol G10 displayed in the middle effect symbol area 50b2 is referred to. The effect symbol G10 displayed in the right effect symbol area 50b3 is collectively referred to as "right effect symbol EZ3". That is, in the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, and the right effect symbol area 50b3, the effect symbol G10 consisting of numbers 1 to 9 is commonly displayed, but the effect symbols are displayed at relative display positions. When distinguishing G10, it is referred to as a left effect symbol EZ1, a middle effect symbol EZ2, and a right effect symbol EZ3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20B, it is possible to provide a small symbol area 50c for variably displaying a small symbol in one section of the left end (lower left corner) of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a. In the small symbol area 50c, the small symbol can be variably displayed according to the variable display of the special symbol. The design of the small symbol can be set as appropriate, but for example, the numerical portion of the staging symbol G10 can be reduced as it is to be configured.

In FIG. 20B, the left effect symbol area 50b1, the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c are clearly indicated by a alternate long and short dash line, but this is the left effect symbol area 50b1. It is described to represent the range of the middle effect symbol area 50b2, the right effect symbol area 50b3, and the small symbol area 50c, and is not actually displayed.

Further, as described above, as the effects constituting the effect flow of the special figure variation effect, there are normal variation, N reach, L reach, SP reach, and battle effect. Here, some of these will be described.

4-2-1. Normal fluctuation The pachinko gaming machine PY can first perform normal fluctuation in the special figure fluctuation production. The normal fluctuation functions as an effect suggesting that the variable display of the special figure has started. Next, the normal fluctuation will be specifically described. As the small symbols, the left small symbol KZ1, the medium small symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 corresponding to the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are variably displayed in the small symbol area 50c.

For example, as shown in FIG. 21 (A), the left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed on the display unit 50a, and the left small symbol KZ1, the medium and small symbols KZ2, and the right small are displayed. When the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the symbol KZ3 is stopped and displayed, the variable display of the special figure is not performed, and the variable display of the special figure is waiting, FIG. 21 (B). As shown in, the special figure fluctuation effect is started with the start. Specifically, the variation display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started, and the variation display of the left small symbol KZ1, the small and medium-sized symbol KZ2, and the right small symbol KZ3 is started.

It is possible to make the display mode of the variable display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 different from the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3. For example, the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed by scrolling the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 from the top to the bottom of the display unit 50a, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed by displaying each small symbol KZ1 to KZ3. It may be replaced one after another at a fixed position. The display mode of the variable display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 may be the same as the display mode of the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3.

Further, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed immediately after the start of the variable display. While the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are variablely displayed at high speed, the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are basically images on the background side such as background images G111 to G115. Is displayed with transparency that is easy to see.

Then, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss without reach (for example, the normal loss fluctuation), the variable display of the special figure ends without the reach occurring (special figure). The stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is performed with the loss stitches (so-called “barracuda stitches”) peculiar to the loss without reach).

Toward the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, for example, first, as shown in FIG. 21 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then is shown in FIG. 21 (D). As shown in FIG. 21 (E), the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and further, as shown in FIG. 21 (E), the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction.

Finally, as shown in FIG. 21 (F), the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which are temporarily stopped in a state of being lined up in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, are completely stopped all at once, and the stop is stopped. Confirm (stop display of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed). When the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped are completely stopped at random points, that is, when the stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 become the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3. It stops all at once with the same variation, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed.

In the example of FIG. 21, when the stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the staging symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of left staging symbol EZ1 → right staging symbol EZ3 → middle staging symbol EZ2, but the staging symbols are temporarily stopped. The embodiment is not limited to this, and can be appropriately set.

4-2-2. Reach Next, the establishment of reach will be explained. Even when the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of the loss with reach (for example, the N loss fluctuation), basically, the display unit 50a has the same as the case without the reach described above. As shown in FIG. 22 (A), the variable display of the special figure is started from the state where the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed. As shown in B), the variation display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 starts, and the variation display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 starts.

Then, after a lapse of a predetermined time, as shown in FIG. 22 (C), the left effect symbol EZ1 according to the number "5" temporarily stops at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and then is shown in FIG. 22 (D). As described above, the right effect symbols EZ3 having the same number "5" are temporarily stopped side by side in the horizontal direction at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and reach is established. Even if the reach is established by the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is continuously performed.

Further, in the example of FIG. 22, when the reach is established, the staging symbols are temporarily stopped in the order of the left staging symbol EZ1 → the right staging symbol EZ3. Can be done. Further, the number of the staging pattern constituting the reach is not limited to "5". Further, the position of temporary stop is not limited to the substantially central position in the vertical direction. Further, the direction in which the effect symbols constituting the reach are lined up is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be another direction such as an oblique direction.

In this way, the entire period of the special map variation effect when there is no reach loss and the section from the start of the special map variation effect when reach occurs to the time when the reach is established can be set as normal fluctuations. However, the time until the reach is established can be appropriately set based on the special figure fluctuation pattern and the like. Furthermore, it is also possible to execute various notice effects such as so-called "pseudo-ren", cut-in notice, and dialogue notice until the reach is established. Alternatively, it is possible to enter the so-called "zone" until the reach is established.

4-2-3. The N-reach pachinko gaming machine PY can perform N-reach when the reach is established after the normal fluctuation. The N reach is a production that suggests that the lottery result of the special drawing lottery may have been a "big hit", and functions as a production for making the player expect a big hit. Next, N reach will be specifically described.

When the reach is established, for example, as shown in FIG. 22D, N reach is performed from that point. In N reach, as shown in FIG. 23 (A), the state when the reach is established is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). When the N reach is started, as shown in FIG. 23 (B), the medium effect symbol EZ2, which is displaying (scrolling) at high speed in the normal mode, gradually decelerates.

If the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is the special figure fluctuation pattern of loss with reach (for example, N loss fluctuation), the middle effect symbol EZ2 temporarily stops at the substantially center position in the vertical direction from the state where the reach is established. Then, the stop display of the effect symbol indicating the loss is performed. At this time, since the reach is established, as shown in FIG. 23 (C-1), a medium effect symbol composed of a number different from the numbers constituting the reach (“4” in FIG. 23 (C-1)). EZ2 temporarily stops. Then, with the end of the variable display of the special figure (stop display of the special figure), as shown in FIG. 23 (D), the temporary stop state becomes a complete stop state, and the loss is peculiar to the loss with reach. The left effect symbol EZ1, the middle effect symbol EZ2, and the right effect symbol EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

Further, when the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 that have been temporarily stopped are completely stopped due to the loss peculiar to the loss with reach, that is, when the stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the three small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 However, it stops all at once with the same loss eyes peculiar to the loss with reach as the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and the stop display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is also performed. The contents of N reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

When the special figure variation effect does not end at N reach, as shown in FIG. 23 (C-2), the remaining one medium effect symbol EZ2 that has not stopped fluctuates at high speed again, and N while the reach is maintained. It may develop (switch) from reach to L reach or SP reach.

4-2-4. The L-reach pachinko gaming machine PY can perform L-reach after N-reach. The L reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is higher than that of the N reach, and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit. Although the established reach is maintained even in the L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24 (A), at the start of the L reach, the staging symbols EZ1 and EZ3 constituting the reach are reduced and displayed. The left effect symbol EZ1 moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a) in the unit 50a so as not to overlap the small symbol area 50c.

Further, at the start of L reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 24A, a background image dedicated to L reach (background image G114 for L reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image G114 for L reach is composed of a moving image developed by a predetermined Thule. The content of the story of the moving image related to the background image G114 for L reach can be appropriately set, but in the basic embodiment, the main character confesses to the girl.

When the background image G114 for L reach is displayed, it starts from a scene where the main character is waiting for a girl at a meeting place as shown in FIG. 24 (A). Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 24 (B), a girl appears at the meeting place. At this time, at the substantially center of the display unit 50a, the effect symbol of the number "5" constituting the reach and the effect symbol of the number "4" not constituting the reach appear as the middle effect symbol EZ2. Then, it slowly rotates so that it comes out from the back side to the front side and then returns to the back side.

While the effect symbol of the number "4" and the effect symbol of the number "5" are continuously rotated, the Thule related to the background image G114 for L reach progresses. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (C), the hero character confesses to the girl. At this time, at the substantially center of the display unit 50a, the effect symbol of the number "5" constituting the reach and the effect symbol of the number "4" not constituting the reach will mutually repel the opponent. Collide with each other. Since the staging symbol of the number "5" constitutes the reach and the staging symbol of the number "4" does not constitute the reach, the staging symbol of the number "4" is skipped and the staging symbol of the number "5" is If it remains, the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 showing the jackpot is established, while the effect symbol of the number "5" is skipped and the effect symbol of the number "4" remains, the effect of the aspect showing the reach loss. The stop display of the symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is established. Therefore, the scene of FIG. 24C is the final phase of the L reach, and the effect suggesting a big hit (big hit suggestion effect) is executed or the effect suggesting a loss (loss suggestion effect) is executed. It constitutes a branch point that branches into a crab (so-called "winning branch point").

If the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the jackpot fluctuation (L jackpot fluctuation) at the hit branch point, a smiling girl is up on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 25 (A-1). After being displayed, as shown in FIG. 25 (B-1), after the smiling girl showing the hero character who is happy to succeed in confession is displayed in close-up, in FIG. 25 (B-1). As shown, the main character who is happy to succeed in confession is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. At this time, along with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the number "5" constituting the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display unit 50a. Displayed in mode. That is, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the hero character who is happy to succeed in confession and the output of a predetermined sound effect constitute a jackpot suggestion effect. After the jackpot suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 25 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the loss variation with reach (L loss variation) after the hit branch point, the figure is shown in the background image G114 for L reach without performing the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in FIG. 25 (A-2), after a girl with a sad expression is displayed up on the display unit 50a, as shown in FIG. 25 (B-2), she fails to confess and is disappointed. The main character is displayed. At this time, along with the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 of the number "5" constituting the reach, the middle effect symbol EZ2 of the number "5" not constituting the reach is temporarily stopped at the center of the display unit 50a. It is displayed in. That is, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the hero character who fails to confess and is discouraged constitutes a loss suggestion effect. After the loss suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 25 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches for reach.

4-2-5. SP reach Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY can perform SP reach after N reach. The SP reach is an effect that suggests that the possibility that the result of the special drawing lottery is a "big hit" is higher than that of the L reach, and functions as an effect for the player to expect a big hit. Although the established reach is maintained even in the SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 26 (A), at the start of the SP reach, the staging symbols EZ1 and EZ3 constituting the reach are reduced and displayed. The left effect symbol EZ1 moves to a predetermined position (for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 is on the upper left of the display unit 50a, and the right effect symbol EZ3 is on the upper right of the display unit 50a) in the unit 50a so as not to overlap the small symbol area 50c.

Further, at the start of SP reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 26A, a background image dedicated to SP reach (background image G115 for SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The background image G115 for SP reach is composed of a moving image developed by a predetermined Thule. The content of the story of the video related to the background image G115 for SP reach can be set as appropriate, but in the basic embodiment, the main character and the enemy character, which is a rival of the main character, confront each other. ing. The main character is a baseball pitcher, and the enemy character is a baseball batter, who face each other in a baseball game as a pitcher and a batter.

When the background image G115 for SP reach is displayed, an enemy character first appears as shown in FIG. 26 (A), and then, as shown in FIG. 26 (B), in the center of the display unit 50a. An image (SP reach start title image) G11 indicating that the SP reach has been started is displayed. The SP reach start title image G11 is composed of a title image G11a representing the title of the SP reach (“beat the enemy batter XX !!” in FIG. 26 (B)) and an effect image G11b that enhances the title image G11a. To.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26 (C), a scene in which the main character and the enemy character are facing each other is displayed. After that, in the background image G115 for SP reach, the main character throws the ball as shown in FIG. 27 (A), and the ball advances toward the enemy character as shown in FIG. 27 (B). As shown in C), the enemy character begins to swing the bat. Then, as shown in FIG. 27 (D), the ball and the bat approach each other, and the confrontation between the main character and the enemy character is about to be settled. This scene constitutes a turning point (winning turning point) where the main character wins in the confrontation between the pitcher and the batter and a big hit is suggested or a defeat is suggested and a loss is suggested.

After this hit branch point, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is a jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 28 (A-1), the enemy character makes a missed swing on the display unit 50a. After winning the confrontation, as shown in Fig. 28 (B-1), the main character who strikes out the enemy character and screams on the mound is displayed, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52. Will be done. At this time, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a big hit.

The display of the main character who wins the confrontation and screams, and the output of the predetermined sound effect constitute the jackpot suggestion effect. After the jackpot suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 28 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the jackpot.

On the other hand, if the special map fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special map is the reach loss variation (SP loss variation) after the hit branch point, the SP reach background image G115 shows FIG. 28 (SP reach loss variation) without the jackpot suggestion effect. As shown in A-2), the enemy character hits a home run and loses the confrontation, and as shown in FIG. 28 (B-2), the main character is disappointed on the mound. At this time, the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner indicating reach loss.

The display of the hero character who is defeated in the confrontation and is disappointed constitutes a loss suggestion production. After the loss suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 28 (C-2), the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are stopped and displayed with the loss stitches for reach.

Next, the movable body effect and the operation effect performed in the special figure variation effect will be described. The movable body effect and the operation effect are independent of these effects when they are performed as a part of these effects in a form incorporated into the above-mentioned SP reach, L reach, N reach, and even a jackpot game effect. May be done. First, the movable body production will be described.

4-3. Movable body effect The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform a movable body effect accompanied by an operation of a movable body at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. The movable body effect is an effect using a movable device such as a board movable device 55, and functions as an effect suggesting the degree of expectation of a big hit and the development to SP reach.

For example, when the movable body effect functions as an effect suggesting the development to SP reach, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), when developing from N reach to SP reach in the special figure variation effect, first of all, FIG. 29. As shown in (B), the board movable device 55 operates, the board movable body 55k descends to the operating position in front view, and is held at that position for a predetermined time. Further, at this time, the effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the movable board 55k is also displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 29 (C), the effect image G13 is erased, the board movable body 55k rises to the standby position, and the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state. When the board movable device 55 returns to the normal standby state, it develops into SP reach. The operation content of the movable device in the movable body effect can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-4. Operation effect Next, the operation effect will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY has an operation promotion effect and an operation result effect according to the operation of the first effect button 40k, the second effect button 41k, etc. at a predetermined timing in a predetermined effect such as a special figure variation effect or a jackpot game effect. It is possible to perform an operation effect including. The operation promotion effect is an effect that encourages the player to operate the operation means, and the operation result effect is an effect that is performed according to the operation of the operation means in the operation promotion effect. Functions as a production.

For example, as described above, when the winning branch point is reached in the L reach or SP reach, a period during which the pressing operation of the first effect button 40k is valid (the first effect button operation valid period) occurs, and this first effect button With the occurrence of the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 30A, an effect of urging the operation of the first effect button 40k (first effect button operation promotion effect) is performed.

In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The first effect button operation promotion effect image G12 is an image (operation target image) G12a representing the first effect button 40k, which is an operation target, and an image (that is, pressing operation) representing an operation mode (that is, pressing operation) of the first effect button 40k. Operation image) G12b and an image (first effect button operation valid period remaining time image) G12c showing the remaining time of the operation valid period (first effect button operation valid period) related to the operation of the first effect button 40k are included. ..

The first effect button operation valid period remaining time image G12c is composed of a generally curved progress bar so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period with the passage of time. Changes to. Note that FIG. 30B shows a state in which the first effect button operation valid period has occurred and one-third of the first effect button operation effective time has elapsed.

When the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is a jackpot fluctuation (SP jackpot fluctuation), after the first effect button 40k is pressed during the first effect button operation valid period, or after the first effect button is pressed, or the first effect button. The operation result effect is performed after the remaining time of the first effect button operation valid period is exhausted without the first effect button 40k being operated during the operation valid period.

As an operation result effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 30C, the board movable device 55 is operated, the board movable body 55k is lowered to the operating position, held at that position for a predetermined time, and the rotating member 55k1 is produced. Rotates for a predetermined time. In this way, the operation result effect includes the movable body effect. Further, at this time, as an operation result effect, the effect image G13 accompanying the operation of the board movable body 55k is displayed on the entire display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 30D, the effect image G13 is erased, the rotation of the rotating member 55k1 is stopped, and the board movable body 55k is raised, so that the operation result production is completed. When the operation result effect is completed, a jackpot suggestion effect is performed.

On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation pattern of the variable display of the special figure is reach loss fluctuation (SP loss fluctuation), even if the first effect button 40k is pressed during the first effect button operation valid period, or the first effect button is pressed. Even if the remaining time of the effect button operation valid period is exhausted without the 40k being pressed, the operation result effect is not performed and the loss suggestion effect is performed.

The operation result effect is not limited to the operation of the panel movable device 55 and the display of the effect image G13, and can be appropriately changed or added. In addition, the operation effect is not limited to the special figure variation effect, but can also be executed in the big hit effect.

4-5. Look-ahead effect Next, the look-ahead effect that can be executed before the special figure variable display that is the target of the special figure hold is executed will be described. The pachinko gaming machine PY can perform a look-ahead effect for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold for which the jackpot judgment has not been performed, based on the result of the look-ahead determination at any timing of the special figure variation effect. .. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit for the special figure 1 hold or the special figure 2 hold, and functions as an effect that makes the big hit expected even before the variable display of the special figure corresponding to the hold. As an example of the look-ahead effect, there is a hold change notice using a hold effect indicating a special figure hold. Here, a hold effect and a hold change notice performed in the normal effect mode will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31A, the hold display is performed in the hold display area 50d formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape in a substantially central section at the lower end of the display unit 50a. The hold display area 50d is composed of a first area 50d1, a second area 50d2, a third area 50d3, and a fourth area 50d4, which are obtained by dividing the hold display area 50d into four substantially evenly in the left-right direction. That is, in the hold display area 50d, the first area 50d1 to the fourth area 50d4 are provided side by side in order from the left end to the right end.

In the first region 50d1, the special figure 1 variable display is the first to occur in the special figure 1 hold, and the special figure 1 variable display is the first to occur based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon indicating the special figure 1 hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second region 50d2 to the fourth region 50d4, it occurs second to fourth in the reserved special figure 1 hold, and is based on the special figure 1 related random number corresponding to the special figure 1 hold. The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 in which the special figure 1 variable display is performed is displayed in the 2nd to 4th positions.

In the following, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the first area 50d1 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in the hold order 1". Similarly, the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the second area 50d2, the third area 50d3, and the fourth area 50d4 is referred to as "special figure 1 hold in hold order 2" and "hold order 3". It is referred to as "special figure 1 hold" and "special figure 1 hold in hold order 4". That is, the existing special figure 1 hold is referred to as "hold order 1" to "hold order 4" in the order of occurrence.

Further, the variable display area 50e is formed on the left side of the hold display area 50d. In the variation display area 50e, the icon representing the currently executed special figure 1 variation display is displayed. Therefore, the target indicated by the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is different from the target indicated by the hold icon displayed in the hold display area 50d. However, since the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are related, in the following, the display of the hold icon and the display of the icon are collectively referred to as "hold effect". .. In addition, the hold icon and the icon are collectively referred to as an "icon". Further, the running special figure 1 variation display indicated by the icon is also referred to as “the variation”.

In FIG. 31A, the reserved display area 50d and the variable display area 50e are indicated by a alternate long and short dash line, and the first region 50d1 to the fourth region 50d4 are indicated by a broken line. It is described to represent the range of the first region 50d1 to the fourth region 50d4 and the variable display region 50e, and is not actually displayed.

Next, a specific example of the hold effect will be described. In the following description, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 will be omitted. As a premise, it is assumed that the special figure 1 change is being displayed (the special figure change is being produced) and the special figure 1 hold number (U1) is "2". Under this circumstance, as shown in FIG. 31 (B), in the above-mentioned first area 50d1 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (holding order) that occurred first among the special figure 1 hold currently held. The hold icon HA2 representing the special figure 1 hold of 1 is displayed, and in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown), the special figure 1 hold (hold order 2) that occurs after the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA2 is displayed. The hold icon HA3 indicating the special figure 1 hold) is displayed. Further, in the above-mentioned variation display area 50e (not shown), the icon HA1 representing the currently executing special figure 1 variation display is displayed. The display mode of the icons HA1 to HA3 displayed in FIG. 31B is a normal mode.

As described above, in the hold effect, the hold display area 50d is displayed side by side from the left end to the right in the order in which the special figure 1 hold occurs. That is, the variable display of the reserved special symbol, in other words, the variable display of the unexecuted special symbol based on the special symbol-related determination information stored in the special symbol reservation storage unit 105, is individually displayed by the hold icon. To.

Then, as shown in FIG. 31 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA1 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold representing the hold icon HA2, the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 shift. Specifically, the hold icon HA2 displayed in the first area 50d1 (not shown) moves to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA3 displayed in the second area 50d2 (not shown) is not shown. Move to the first region 50d1 in the figure. That is, the displayed hold icon HA2 and hold icon HA3 are shifted to the left by one each. This is because the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon HA2 is started, and the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3 is the earliest occurrence of the special figure 1 hold currently held. This is to adapt the hold icon HA2 and the hold icon HA3 to the situation according to the change of the special figure variable display to be started next.

Further, since the hold icon HA2 displayed in the variation display area 50e represents the execution special figure 1 variation display, it becomes the icon HA2 when it is displayed in the variation display area 50e. That is, as a word attached before the "icon", the icon displayed in the hold display area 50d is referred to as "hold", and the icon displayed in the variable display area 50e is referred to as "corresponding". In other words, when the hold icon is displayed and the start condition for the variable display of the special symbol is satisfied for the special symbol hold indicated by the hold icon, the variable display of the special symbol related to the establishment of the start condition is displayed. The corresponding hold icon is displayed as the icon.

In addition, when the icon is changed from the hold icon to the icon, in other words, when the icon is moved from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e, the size of the icon may remain the same or may be enlarged. In FIG. 31C, the icon is magnified about twice when moving from the hold display area 50d to the variable display area 50e.

Then, when the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 from this situation and the special figure 1 hold occurs, as shown in FIG. 31 (E), a new hold occurs in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. The icon HA4 is displayed in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown).

In this way, when a prize is won in the first starting port 11 and a random number related to the special figure 1 is acquired, one common icon is displayed. This icon disappears when the special figure 1 variable display based on the prize is completed, but while it is displayed, the state in which the special figure 1 variable display is placed (pending state and running state). It means that they exist under different names (hold icon and the icon) depending on the situation.

By the way, as described above, the start winning command includes the winning / failing information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Then, the pachinko gaming machine PY can display the hold icon in a normal mode or a special mode based on the pass / fail information and the special figure fluctuation pattern information. Displaying this hold icon in a special manner is called "hold notice".

When the display mode of the hold icon is a special mode, that is, when the hold notice is given, the player can expect that the jackpot may be won by the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the hold icon. Next, a specific example of the hold notice will be described. As a specific example of the hold notice, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon HA4 shown in FIG. 31 (E) is a special mode.

As one type of hold notice, it becomes a special mode immediately after the hold icon is displayed, in other words, the hold notice is given when the special figure 1 hold occurs (when the first starting port 11 is won). There is a type. For example, as shown in FIG. 32 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 31 (D)), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned event occurs, the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode is displayed in the above-mentioned second area 50d2 (not shown) in response to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold, as in the case of FIG. 31 (E). In the drawing, the hold icon in the normal mode seems to be completely stationary, but in reality, basically, even if it is made completely stationary, the display position does not move, but the display position does not move. It may be configured to shake lightly in the field.

Immediately after that, as shown in FIG. 32 (B), the display mode of the hold icon HA4 changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 32 (B)) (hold notice is given). In the example of FIGS. 31 and 32, the hold icon HA4 is displayed in the normal mode for a moment immediately after the display, but it may be displayed in the special mode and the period displayed in the normal mode may be eliminated.

As another type of hold notice, there is a hold notice type that becomes a special mode when the hold icon moves, in other words, the hold icon change notice is given at the time of the shift of the special figure 1 hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 33 (A), from the situation before the hold icon HA4 is displayed (the situation in FIG. 31 (D)), the game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 11 and the special figure 1 is held. When the above-mentioned second region 50d2 (not shown) is generated, as shown in FIG. 33 (B), the hold icon HA4 in the normal mode (white in FIG. 33 (B)) corresponds to the occurrence of the special figure 1 hold. Is displayed in.

Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (C), when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed, the icon HA2 representing the special figure variation display being executed until immediately before that is deleted. Subsequently, when the variable display of the special symbol (special figure variation effect) is started based on the special figure 1 hold represented by the hold icon HA3, it is displayed in the first area 50d1 as shown in FIG. 33 (D). The hold icon HA3 is moved to the variable display area 50e (not shown), and the hold icon HA4 displayed in the second area 50d2 is moved to the first area 50d1 (not shown). Here, when the hold icon HA4 moves from the second area 50d2 to the first area 50d1, the display mode changes from the normal mode to the special mode (gray in FIG. 33 (D)) (hold notice is given). ..

In addition, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of special modes related to the hold notice so that the jackpot expectation degree differs depending on the type of the special mode. For example, it is assumed that the display mode of the hold icon is associated with the color of the hold icon, and white, green, red, and gold are set as the display mode of the hold icon. Here, white is a normal embodiment, and green, red, and gold are special embodiments. Then, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the display mode of the hold icon can be set so as to increase in the order of white <green <red <gold.

The look-ahead effect can be performed on both or one of the special figure 1 hold and the special figure 2 hold. Further, the look-ahead effect is not limited to the display mode of the hold icon HA, for example, an image other than the hold icon HA on the display unit 50a such as a background image, a sound output from the speaker 52, light emission by the frame lamp 53, and a movable board. It is possible to execute the operation by using an effect device other than the image display device 50 such as the operation by the device 55. Furthermore, as an effect mode of the look-ahead effect, in addition to the effect mode that continues uninterrupted from the execution such as the hold icon change notice by the hold icon HA until the special figure change display is started, the effect symbol is stopped. It may be an effect mode that is executed intermittently and continuously, such as every time the display is performed or every time the variable display of the effect symbol is started.

5. Game control by the game control microcomputer 101 [Game control main processing]
Next, the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 44. The flowchart for controlling the game described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, the counter, timer, flag, status, buffer, etc. that appear in the game control by the game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in the game RAM 104. Further, the initial value of the counter is "0", the initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", and the initial value of the status is "1".

When the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 190 to the game control board 100, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out and executes the game control main processing program shown in FIG. 34 from the game ROM 103.

As shown in the figure, in the game control main process, the game control microcomputer 101 first prohibits interrupts (S1), and then sets access to the game RAM 104 to allow (S2). Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value setting operation for setting the set value has been performed (S3). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the set value cylinder 70 is rotated from the reference state and the set value switch 71 is pressed. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S4 if it determines that the set value setting operation has not been performed, and proceeds to step S7 if it determines that the set value setting operation has been performed, and proceeds to step S7 to set the set value. After performing the setting process, the process proceeds to step S8. The setting value setting process will be described later.

In step S4, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the setting process of the game RAM 104 that sets the initial value in the used area of the game RAM 104 that requires the initial value, and in step S5, the power recovery command is issued to the game RAM 104. It is set in the output buffer and transmitted to the effect control board 120, and in step S6, the set value indicated by the set value data stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 is displayed on the set value display 87, and the step. Proceed to S10.

Further, in step S8, the game control microcomputer 101 clears the used area of the game RAM 104, performs the setting process of the game RAM 104 to set the initial value in the used area of the game RAM 104 that requires the initial value, and then performs the setting process. In step S9, the RAM clear command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120.

The game control microcomputer 101 performs a CTC activation setting process for setting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit: circuit for managing interrupt time) or the like to be used in step S10, and permits interrupts in step S11.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process in step S12. In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal symbol-related determination information and the special symbol-related determination information are added by 1 and updated. When the counter value of each random number reaches the upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of the counter of each random number may be a value other than "0" or may be changed at random. Further, at least a part of each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process is completed, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S13 whether or not the power supply has been cut off. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not a power failure detection signal has been input from the power failure detection circuit of the power supply board 190. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply is not cut off, the game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S12. On the other hand, when the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the power supply has been cut off, the interrupt is prohibited in step S14, the access to the game RAM 104 is prohibited in step S15, and the data stored in the game RAM 104 is stored. Is stored as backup data, and then waits for the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY to be cut off.

[Set value setting process]
Next, the set value setting process (S7) will be described with reference to FIG. 35. In the set value setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 first stores the set value data backed up in the game RAM 104 in the set value storage unit 107 in step S51, and sets the set value indicated by the set value data. It is displayed on the value display 87 (S51).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S52 whether or not the set value switch 71 has been operated. If the game control microcomputer 101 determines that the set value switch 71 has not been operated, the process proceeds to step S55, and if it is determined that the set value switch 71 has been operated, the game control microcomputer 101 determines in step S53 that the set value storage unit of the game RAM 104 has been operated. The set value indicated by the set value data stored in 107 is increased by "1" to set a new set value, and in step S54, the new set value is displayed on the set value display 87.

In the basic embodiment, the set value is set in 6 stages from 1 to 6, and when the set value switch 71 is operated when the set value is "6", the set value "1" is newly set. Will be. The mode of changing the set value by operating the set value switch 71 is not limited to "1" increase, but may be "1" decrease or random change.

In step S55, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not there has been an operation for confirming the set value. Specifically, in the game control microcomputer 101, the set value cylinder 70 is turned off based on the set value cylinder sensor 70a, that is, has the set value cylinder 70 been rotated from the set state and returned to the basic state? Judge whether or not. The game control microcomputer 101 proceeds to step S52 when it is determined that there is no operation for confirming the set value, and when it is determined that there is an operation for confirming the set value, it is stored in the set value storage unit 107 of the game RAM 104 in step S56. The set value specification command indicating the set value indicated by the set value data is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120, the set value setting process is completed, and the process returns to the game control main process.

By performing a rotation operation for shifting the set value cylinder 70 from the set state to the reference state according to step S55, the set value setting process is completed and the set value is confirmed. Therefore, this operation confirms the set value. It can be positioned as an operation to make it. On the other hand, the rotation operation for changing the set value cylinder 70 from the reference state to the set state according to step S3 can be positioned as an operation for setting the set value. In the following, the former operation is referred to as a "set value confirmation operation" of the set value cylinder 70, and the latter operation is referred to as a "set value setting operation" of the set value cylinder 70.

[Game control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the game control side timer interrupt processing will be described. The game control microcomputer 101 generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec) by a reset clock pulse generation circuit provided on the game control board 100, so that the game control side timer interrupt shown in FIG. 36 is generated. Execute the process.

As shown in FIG. 36, the game control microcomputer 101 first executes an output process (S101) in the game control side timer interrupt process. In the output process, commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104 of the game control board 100 in each process described below are output to the effect control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like.

In the input process (S102) performed after the output process, the game control microcomputer 101 takes in the detection signal from the lower plate full switch that detects the fullness of the surplus ball storage hole 35A, and uses the lower plate full data as the lower plate full data in the game RAM 104. Store in the output buffer.

The next normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (S103) is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the game control main process of FIG. 34. That is, the update processing of the counter values of various random numbers related to the normal figure-related judgment information and the special figure-related judgment information is performed during the execution period of the game control side timer interrupt process and other periods (after the game control side timer interrupt process is completed). , The period until the next game control side timer interrupt process is started).

Following the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then a normal operation process (S105), and further performs a special operation process (S106). The sensor detection process, normal operation process, and special operation process will be described later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S107) to end the game control side timer interrupt processing. Other processes include updating the timer provided in the gaming RAM 104. In addition, as another process, a payout control process for paying out prize balls to the player is performed. In the payout control process, the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11, the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12, the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14, and the prize ball counter for the general winning opening 10 are " It is checked whether or not it exceeds "0", and if it exceeds "0", the prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control board 170. Then, when the prize ball signal is transmitted, the update process of subtracting "1" from the prize ball counter related to the signal is performed.

Then, the game control microcomputer 101 repeatedly executes the processes of the game control main processes S12 to S13 until the interrupt pulse is input to the game CPU 102 next time, and when the clock pulse is input, the game control is performed again. Executes side timer interrupt processing. The game control microcomputer 101 outputs a command or the like set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 in the previous game control side timer interrupt process in the output process (S101) of the game control side timer interrupt process executed again. ..

[Sensor detection processing]
Next, the sensor detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 38. In the sensor detection process (S104), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the general winning opening 10, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the general winning opening sensor 10a (S201). If no game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (NO in S201), the process proceeds to step S203, and if a game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 (YES in S201), a predetermined number of game balls have been entered. General prize-winning prize ball processing for paying out prize balls is performed (S202). In the general winning opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, "3") corresponding to the winning of the general winning opening 10 is added to the winning ball counter for the general winning opening 10.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 13, that is, whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 13a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S207. On the other hand, if the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S203), whether or not the normal operation status described later is 1, in other words, whether or not the variable display of the normal figure or the auxiliary game is performed. It is determined whether or not (S204). If the normal operation status is not 1 (NO in S204), the process proceeds to step S207, and if the normal operation status = 1 (YES in S204), the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter (label-TRND-F). The normal symbol random number indicated by the above is acquired as the normal diagram-related determination information (S205), and the acquired normal symbol-related determination information is stored in the normal diagram holding storage unit 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S206). Proceed to.

In step S207, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the second starting port sensor 12a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 12 (NO in S207), the process proceeds to step S214, and if the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 12 (YES in S207), the game ball is designated. The second starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S208). In the second starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, “4”) corresponding to the winning of the second starting port 12 is added to the prize ball counter for the second starting port 12.

Next, when the special figure 2 hold number (specifically, the numerical value of the counter (special figure 2 hold number counter) for counting the special figure 2 hold number provided in the gaming RAM 104) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not there is (S209). If the number of special figure 2 hold is "4" or more (YES in S209), the process proceeds to step S214, but if the number of special figure 2 hold is not "4" or more (less than "4"), the process proceeds to step S214. NO in S209), special figure 2 holding number addition processing is performed (S210). In the special figure 2 hold number addition process, the special figure 2 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold indicator 83b is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP). ) Is acquired and stored in the special figure-related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S211).

Next, the second look-ahead determination process is performed (S212). In the second look-ahead determination process, the second start-up winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the second look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The second start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 2 related determination information acquired in step S211 in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b (S213).

Subsequently, in step S214, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first start port 11, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the first start port sensor 11a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 11 (NO in S214), the process proceeds to step S221, and if the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 11 (YES in S214), the game ball is designated. The first starting opening prize ball processing for paying out the number of prize balls is performed (S215). In the first starting port prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, "4") corresponding to the winning of the first starting port 11 is added to the prize ball counter for the first starting port 11.

Next, the number of special figure 1 hold (specifically, the numerical value of the counter for counting the number of special figure 1 hold provided in the gaming RAM 104 (special figure 1 hold number counter)) is "4" (upper limit storage number) or more. It is determined whether or not it is (S216). If the number of special figure 1 hold is "4" or more (YES in S216), the process proceeds to step S221, but if the number of special figure 1 hold is not (less than) "4" or more (NO in S216). ), The special figure 1 hold number addition process is performed (S217). In the special figure 1 hold number addition process, the special figure 1 hold number counter is added by "1", and the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold indicator 83a is increased by "1".

Subsequently, a special symbol random number counter (label-TRND-T), a jackpot symbol random number counter (label-TRND-OS), a reach random number counter (label-TRND-RC), and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter (label-TRND-HP). ) Is acquired and stored in the special figure-related determination information buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S218).

Next, the first look-ahead determination process is performed (S219). In the first look-ahead determination process, the first start winning command is specified and specified by collating the current gaming state with the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the first look-ahead determination table shown in FIG. The first start winning command is set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 stores the special figure 1 related determination information acquired in step S218 in the storage area of the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a according to the current number of special figure 1 hold (S220).

In step S221, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the large winning opening 14, that is, whether or not the game ball has been detected by the large winning opening sensor 14a. If the game ball has not won in the large winning opening 14 (NO in S221), the sensor detection process is terminated, and if the game ball has won in the large winning opening 14 (YES in S221), the gaming RAM 104 is entered. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the provided large winning opening winning counter is "9" or more (S222). The big winning opening winning counter is a counter for counting the number of winnings in the big winning opening 14 in one round game of the big hit game. In addition, the big winning opening winning counter is cleared every time each round game is completed. In the basic embodiment, the winning rule number is set to "8". Therefore, the process of step S222 is performed.

When the counter value of the big prize opening winning counter is "9" or more (YES in S222), the sensor detection process is terminated and the counter value of the big winning opening winning counter is not "9" or more, that is, less than "9". If (NO in S222), the counter value of the large prize opening prize counter is added by "1" (S223), and the large winning opening prize ball processing for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls to the player is performed (S224). ), End the sensor detection process. In the large prize opening prize ball processing, the number of prize balls (for example, "14") corresponding to the winning of the large winning opening 14 is added to the prize ball counter for the large winning opening 14.

As a sensor capable of detecting the game ball, a sensor other than the sensors 10a to 14a is provided, and based on the sensor detecting the game ball, processing other than the processing shown in FIGS. 35 to 38 is performed. Is also good.

[Normal operation processing]
Next, the normal operation processing related to the control of the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, the processing related to the normal figure display 82 and the electric chew 12D is divided into four statuses (stages). Then, "normal operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "normal operation status" in the normal operation process (S105) (S1101). When the "normal operation status" is "1", the normal symbol standby process (S1102) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "2", the normal symbol variation process (S1103) is performed. When the "normal operation status" is "3", the normal symbol determination process (S1104) is performed, and when the "normal operation status" is "4", the auxiliary game control process (S1105) is performed. The "normal operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The normal symbol standby process (S1102) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the normal map and the auxiliary game are not performed. In the normal symbol standby process (S1102), a hit determination is performed based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol hold storage unit 106. Further, the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined based on the current gaming state, and the normal map fluctuation pattern is determined, and the normal map fluctuation display of the normal map fluctuation time according to the determined normal map fluctuation pattern is displayed on the normal map display 82. And change the normal operation status to "2". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation start command according to the normal map fluctuation pattern determination result in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map variation display.

The normal symbol variation process (S1103) is a process performed when the normal symbol is variablely displayed. In the normal symbol variation processing (S1103), it is determined whether or not the normal map fluctuation time has elapsed since the execution of the normal map variation display started (whether or not the normal map variation display is terminated), and the normal symbol variation processing is performed. If it is determined that the figure fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop display of the normal figure is performed based on the hit determination result, and the normal operation status is changed to "3". Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the normal map fluctuation stop command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the normal map fluctuation display.

The normal symbol determination process (S1104) is a process performed when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed. In the normal symbol confirmation process (S1104), whether or not a predetermined stop time (for example, 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the running normal figure started (whether to end the stop display of the normal figure). Whether or not) is determined, and if it is determined that the predetermined stop time has elapsed, it is determined whether or not the normal figure displayed as stopped is a winning symbol. If it is not a winning symbol (if the stopped symbol is a lost symbol), the normal operation status is changed to "1". On the other hand, if the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal operation status is changed to "4", and the auxiliary game is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Further, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the auxiliary game start command in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 at the start of the auxiliary game.

The auxiliary game control process (S1105) is a process performed when the auxiliary game is being performed. In the auxiliary game control process (S1105), the auxiliary game is controlled based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Then, when the auxiliary game is completed, the normal operation status is changed to "1".

[Special operation processing]
Next, the special operation processing relating to the control of the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, the processing related to the special figure display 81, the special figure hold display 83, and the grand prize device 14D is divided into six statuses (stages). Then, "special operation status = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5" is assigned to each of these statuses. The game control microcomputer 101 first confirms the "special operation status" (S1501).

The game control microcomputer 101 performs special symbol standby processing (S1502) when the "special operation status" is "1", and changes the special symbol when the "special operation status" is "2". The process (S1503) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "3", the special symbol determination process (S1504) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "4", the jackpot game control The process (S1505) is performed, and when the "special operation status" is "5", the game state setting process (S1506) is performed. The "special operation status" is set to "1" by default.

The special symbol standby process (S1502) is a process performed during standby in which the variable display of the special symbol and the jackpot game are not performed. The special symbol standby process will be described in detail later.

The special symbol variation process (S1503) is a process performed when the special symbol is variablely displayed. The special symbol variation processing will be described in detail later.

The special symbol determination process (S1504) is a process performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed. The special symbol determination process will be described in detail later.

The jackpot game control process (S1505) is a process performed in the jackpot game. The game control microcomputer 101 performs the jackpot game control process to perform the jackpot game according to the jackpot game control table. When the jackpot game ends, the special action status is changed to "5". When each round game is started, a round number designation command indicating the number of rounds is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Further, when all the round games are completed and the ending is started, an ending command indicating the ending corresponding to the jackpot symbol related to the jackpot game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

The game state setting process (S1506) is a process of setting a game state to be controlled after the big hit game when the big hit game ends. For example, when controlling in a high probability state after a big hit game, the high probability flag is turned ON in the high probability flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the high probability state. Further, at this time, when limiting the duration of the high probability state, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the high probability state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "high probability specified number of times") is set in the high probability remaining number counter provided in the gaming RAM 104. .. Further, when controlling in the time saving state after the big hit game, the time saving flag is turned ON in the time saving flag area of the game RAM 104 to set the time saving state. Further, at this time, if the duration of the time saving state is limited, the duration is also set. For example, when the end condition of the time saving state is the number of executions of the special figure variable display, the number of times (hereinafter referred to as "time saving specified number of times") is set in the time saving remaining number counter provided in the game RAM 104.

Further, in the game state setting process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a game state command indicating the game state after the big hit game in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

[Special symbol standby processing]
Next, the special symbol standby process will be described with reference to FIG. 41. In the special symbol standby process (S1502), first, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (S1601). When the number of reserved special figures 2 is "0" (YES in S1601), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12, the special figure 2 is a special figure. 1 It is determined whether or not the number of reservations is "0" (S1608). Then, when the number of reserved special figures 1 is also "0" (YES in S1608), that is, when there is no memory of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 11. It is determined whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1618). Here, if the customer wait flag is ON (YES in S1618), the special symbol wait process is completed, and if the customer wait flag is not ON (NO in S1618), the customer wait command is set in the output buffer (S1619). , The customer waiting flag is turned ON (S1620), and the special symbol waiting process is completed.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is "0" but the special figure 1 hold number is not "0" (YES in S1601 and NO in S1608), that is, there is no special figure 2 related determination information, but the first start. When there is one or more stores of the special figure 1 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the mouth 11, the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) are performed.

In the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the earliest stored special symbol random number stored in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a is read out, and the jackpot determination table associated with the current set value is read. Further, based on the jackpot determination table associated with the gaming state, it is determined whether the jackpot is a jackpot or a loss (big hit determination).

Here, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol random number is read out and the jackpot symbol type is determined based on the first jackpot symbol type determination table (big hit symbol type determination). Then, the jackpot symbol data representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol buffer provided in the game RAM 104, and the symbol designation command representing the jackpot symbol type is set in the output buffer provided in the game RAM 104.

If the result of the jackpot determination is "loss", the loss symbol data representing the loss is set in the special symbol buffer, and the symbol designation command indicating the loss is set in the output buffer.

Next, the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610) will be described with reference to FIG. 42. In the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the state is currently in a non-time saving state (S1651). If it is in the non-time saving state (YES in S1651), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the non-time saving state is selected (S1652), and then the process proceeds to step S1654. After selecting the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for the state (S1653), the process proceeds to step S1654.

In step S1654, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the jackpot determination result is "big hit". If it is not a big hit (NO in S1654), the process proceeds to step S1655, and if it is a big hit (YES in S1654), it is for the big hit symbol from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653. After selecting the variation pattern determination table in Special Figure 1 (S1659), the process proceeds to step S1660.

In step S1655, the game control microcomputer 101 makes a reach determination. In the reach determination, the reach random number is read out, and the reach random number is collated with the reach determination table according to the current gaming state (non-time saving state / time saving state) to determine whether or not there is reach.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not the result of the reach determination in step S1655 is “with reach” (S1656). If there is reach (YES in S1656), the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table for loss with reach is selected from the special figure 1 variation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 (S1658). Then, the process proceeds to step S1660, and if there is no reach (NO in S1656), the current number of special figure 1 holdes is confirmed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in either step S1652 or step S1653 is used. Select (S1657) the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table for loss without reach according to the number of reserved special figures 1 and then proceed to step S1660.

In step S1660, the game control microcomputer 101 reads out the special figure fluctuation pattern random number, collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table selected in any of steps S1657 to S1569, and then collates the special figure fluctuation pattern random number with the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination table. Special Figure 1 Judgment of fluctuation pattern Special Figure 1 Judgment of fluctuation pattern is performed. Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 sets the special figure 1 fluctuation start command indicating the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern in the output buffer (S1661), and the special figure fluctuation according to the determined special figure 1 fluctuation pattern. The time is set in the special operation timer (S1662), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process is terminated, and the process is returned to the special symbol standby process.

The special operation timer is updated by 4 ms in other processes in the game control side timer interrupt process. In addition, the set special figure 1 fluctuation start command includes information on the type of special symbol (that is, special figure 1) and the special figure fluctuation pattern determination performed in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1610). Information on the result (information on the special map fluctuation pattern including information on the presence or absence of reach and the special map fluctuation time) is included.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 1 display 81a to start the variation display of the special figure 1 based on the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determined in step S1610 (S1611). ..

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 1 hold storage unit 105a. The storage area corresponding to the first hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 1 hold storage unit shift process (S1612). In this way, the special figure 1 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 1 hold number counter (S1613), and reduces and changes the special figure 1 hold number indicated by the special figure 1 hold display 83a by "1" (S1613). S1614), the special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615).

The game control microcomputer 101 subsequently determines whether or not the customer waiting flag is ON (S1616), if it is ON (YES in S1616), turns off the customer waiting flag (S1617), and performs a special symbol standby process. If it is not ON (NO in S1616), the special symbol standby process is completed without executing step S1617.

Further, when the special figure 2 hold number is not "0" in step S1601 (NO in S1601), that is, one or more of the special figure 2 related determination information acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 12 is stored. If there is, the special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 variation pattern determination process (S1603) are performed. The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) and the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) are basically the same as the special figure 1 determination process (S1609) and the special figure 1 variation pattern determination process (S1610). ..

The special figure 2 determination process (S1602) is basically performed except that the table used for the jackpot determination is the second jackpot determination table and the table used for the jackpot symbol type determination is the second jackpot symbol type determination table. Since the process is the same as that of the special figure 1 determination process (S1609), the description thereof will be omitted. Further, the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) is also basically a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern determination process (S1603) except that the table used in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination is the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern determination table. Since the process is the same as S1610), the description thereof will be omitted.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 causes the special figure 2 display 81b to start the change display of the special figure 2 based on the special figure change time corresponding to the special figure change pattern determined in step S1603 (S1604).

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 shifts the storage location (storage area) of various counter values in the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b to the side to be read from the current position, and the special figure 2 hold storage unit 105b. The storage area corresponding to the fourth hold storage area (the storage area farthest from the read side) is cleared in the special figure 2 hold storage unit shift process (S1605). In this way, the special figure 2 hold is digested in the order in which it was held.

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 subtracts "1" from the special figure 2 hold number counter (S1606), and reduces and changes the special figure 2 hold number indicated by the special figure 2 hold display 83b by "1" (S1607). ), The special operation status is changed to "2" (S1615), and the process proceeds to step S1616.

As described above, in the basic embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the special figure 1 hold is performed only when the special figure 2 hold is "0" (YES in S1601). That is, the digestion of the special figure 2 hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 1 hold. Further, in the basic embodiment, the lottery based on the special figure 2 hold is easier to win the jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the special figure 1 hold. It should be noted that the digestion of the special figure 1 hold may be executed in preference to the digestion of the special figure 2 hold. Further, the digestion of the special figure 1 hold and the digestion of the special figure 2 hold may be performed in the order in which the hold occurs regardless of the type of the special figure.

[Special symbol change processing]
Next, the special symbol variation processing will be described with reference to FIG. 43. In the special symbol variation processing, the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the variation display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol variation time set in the special operation timer in step S1603 or step S1610 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1701). When the variation display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1701), when the variation processing of the special symbol is terminated and the variation display of the special symbol is terminated (YES in S1701), the variation display of the special symbol is displayed on the special symbol display 81. Is terminated, and the stop display of the special symbol according to the symbol data (big hit symbol data or lost special symbol data) set in the special symbol buffer in step S1602 or step S1609 is displayed (S1702).

Subsequently, a preset special figure confirmation time (for example, 0.8 seconds) is set in the special operation timer (S1703), and a special figure change stop command indicating that the change display of the special symbol ends is output as an output buffer. (S1704), the special operation status is changed to "3" (S1705), and the special symbol change processing is terminated.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
Next, the special symbol determination process will be described with reference to FIG. 44. In the special symbol determination process (S1504), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not to end the stop display of the special symbol, that is, the special symbol determination time set in the special operation timer in step S1703 has elapsed (special). It is determined whether or not the operation counter = 0) (S1751). When the stop display of the special symbol is not terminated (NO in S1751), when the stop display of the special symbol is terminated by ending the special symbol confirmation process (YES in S1751), the normal probability state (high probability flag is OFF) is currently present. It is determined whether or not it is (S1752).

If the game control microcomputer 101 is not currently in the normal probability state (NO in S1752), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the normal probability state (YES in S1752), the time reduction state (time reduction flag is ON). Whether or not it is determined (S1753). If the game control microcomputer 101 is not in the time saving state (NO in S1753), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if it is currently in the time saving state (YES in S1753), the rest of the variable display of the special symbol that can be executed in the time saving state. The value of the time saving remaining number counter for measuring the number of times (time saving remaining number) is subtracted by "1" (S1754), and it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving remaining number counter is "0" (S1755). If the value of the time reduction remaining number counter (number of time reduction remaining) is not "0" (NO in S1755), the process proceeds to step S1757, and if the value of the time saving remaining number counter (time reduction remaining number) is "0" (in S1755). YES), the state is changed from the time saving state to the non-time saving state (the time saving flag is turned off) (S1756), and the process proceeds to step S1757.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 confirms the current game state, sets a game state command indicating the game state in the output buffer (S1757), and whether or not the special symbol currently stopped and displayed is a jackpot symbol. (S1758). If it is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S1758), the special operation status is changed to "1" (S1762), the special symbol confirmation process is completed, and if it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S1758), the game state is reset (YES). The normal game state is set. Specifically, the high probability flag and the time saving flag are turned off, and the values of the high probability remaining number counter and the time saving remaining number counter are set to "0") (S1759).

Subsequently, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a jackpot game preparation process (S1760), changes the special operation status to "4" (S1761), and ends the special symbol determination process. In the jackpot game preparation process, the game control microcomputer 101 sets a jackpot game control table according to the type of the jackpot symbol in a predetermined area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the jackpot opening flag indicating that the opening according to the jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed is turned on in the predetermined area of the game RAM 104, and the predetermined opening time (the jackpot game starts) according to the type of the jackpot symbol. (Time from being done to starting one round) is set in the special operation timer. Further, an opening command indicating the type of the jackpot symbol is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 according to the type of the jackpot symbol. The opening command according to the type of the jackpot symbol indicates that the jackpot game (opening of the jackpot game) corresponding to the type of the jackpot symbol that has been stopped and displayed is started.

6. Control of staging by staging control board 120 [Staging control main processing]
Next, the control of the staging by the staging control board 120 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. The flowchart for controlling the effect described below is an example. Then, the plurality of processes in the flowchart can be appropriately changed in the execution order or executed in parallel as long as the processing contents do not conflict with each other.

Further, the counter, timer, flag, buffer and the like appearing in the following description of the control of the effect by the effect control board 120 are provided in the effect RAM 124. When the pachinko gaming machine PY is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 121 provided on the effect control board 120 reads out the effect control main processing program shown in FIG. 45 from the effect ROM 123 and executes it.

As shown in the figure, in the staging control main process, first, the power-on process is performed according to the power-on (S4001). In the power-on processing, for example, the effect CPU 122 is set, and SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time) and the like are set.

Next, the interrupt is disabled (S4002) and the random number seed update process is executed (S4003). In the random number seed update process (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters for making determinations related to various effects are updated. The random numbers for determining the effect include various random numbers for determining the content of the effect, such as a random number for determining a stop symbol pattern and a random number for determining a special figure variation effect pattern, which will be described later.

As an example, the method for updating the random number counter for determination for various effects can be the same as the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above. Instead of adding the random values by 1 at the time of updating, it may be added by 2 or the like. This also applies to the random number update process performed by the game control board 100 described above.

When the random number seed update process is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In the command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 (for example, a special figure variation effect start command, a customer waiting start command, an opening effect start command, and a round effect start, which will be described later). A command, an ending effect start command, etc.) are transmitted to the image control board 140.

The image control board 140 that has received the command displays an image on the display unit 50a according to the received command (executes various effects by the image). Further, the staging control board 120 can output sound from the speaker 52 via the voice control circuit 161 (execute various staging by voice), and the sub drive board, together with various staging performed by the image control board 140. The frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via 162 (various effects are executed by the light emission), and the board movable body 55k is operated (various effects are executed by the operation). The various effects include a special figure variation effect, a jackpot game effect (big hit opening effect, round effect, big hit ending effect), a customer waiting effect, an operation effect, a look-ahead effect, and the like.

The staging control microcomputer 121 subsequently enables interrupts (S4005). After that, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While the interrupt is enabled, the receive interrupt process (S4010), the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) can be executed. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) and the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) will be described later.

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed every time a strobe signal, that is, various commands sent from the game control board 100 are input to the external INT input unit of the effect control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt processing (S4010), the effect control microcomputer 121 stores various commands transmitted and received by the output process (S101) of the game control board 100 in the reception buffer of the effect RAM 124. This receive interrupt process is executed in preference to other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[1ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 1 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 1 msec is input to the effect control board 120. The effect control microcomputer 121 first performs an input process (S4101) in the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011). In the input process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates the first effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the first effect button sensor 40a. The effect control microcomputer 121 creates the second effect button switch data based on the detection signal from the second effect button sensor 41a.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs light emission data output processing (S4102). In the light emission data output process, the effect control microcomputer 121 emits light emission data created by the light emission data creation process (S4203) in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later in order to cause the frame lamp 53 to emit light at a timing that matches the effect of the image. Is output to the sub drive board 162. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53 to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode according to the light emission data.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a movable device control process (S4103). In the movable device control process, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates or outputs drive data (data for driving the board movable body 55k) in order to drive the board movable body 55k at a predetermined timing. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 drives the board movable body 55k in a predetermined operation mode according to the drive data.

Then, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a watchdog timer process for resetting the watchdog timer (S4104), and ends the 1 ms timer interrupt process.

[10ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 47. The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed every time an interrupt pulse having a cycle of 10 msec is input to the effect control board 120. In the 10 ms timer interrupt process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first performs a receive command analysis process for analyzing a command or the like stored in the receive buffer in step S4010 (S4201). The received command analysis process will be described in detail in the first embodiment described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs voice control processing (S4202). In the voice control process, the creation of voice data (data for controlling the output of voice from the speaker 52) and the voice control circuit 161 are performed based on the effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124. Is output.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a light emission data creation process (S4203). In the light emission data creation process, light emission data is created based on the effect content or the like indicated by the special figure variation effect data set in the effect RAM 124.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis process will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 49. In the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first receives a start winning command (first start winning command or second starting winning command) from the game control board 100, in other words, receiving the starting winning command. It is determined whether or not it is stored in the buffer (S4301). If the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the start winning command (YES in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4302, while if the start winning command has not been received (NO in S4301), the process proceeds to step S4303.

In step S4302, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a start winning process according to the winning of the game ball in the first starting port 11 and the second starting port 12. In the start winning process, the received start winning command is stored in the start winning command hold storage unit 125 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the stored start winning command and determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect indicating the jackpot expectation degree. The look-ahead effect includes a hold icon notice that displays the hold icon in a special mode, a continuous notice effect that is performed over a plurality of consecutive variable displays of the special symbol, and the like. When it is decided to execute these look-ahead effects, a look-ahead effect start command for executing the determined effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

When the look-ahead effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 receives a predetermined effect from the image ROM 142. The image is read out, and the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 performs a look-ahead effect using the image. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 controls voice according to the pre-reading effect content indicated by the pre-reading effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140 while the pre-reading effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed. An image is output from the speaker 52 via the circuit 161 (a look-ahead effect is executed by the sound), and a frame lamp 53 is made to emit light via a sub drive board 162 (a look-ahead effect is executed by the light emission). It is possible to operate 55k (perform a look-ahead effect by the operation).

In step S4303, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the symbol designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the symbol designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the symbol specification command (NO in S4303), the process proceeds to step S4305, while if the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the symbol specification command (YES in S4303), the effect control microcomputer 121 issues the symbol specification command to the effect RAM 124. It is stored in the symbol designation command storage unit 126 in (S4304).

In step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure change start command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure change start command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the special figure change start command has not been received (NO in S4305), the process proceeds to step S4307, while if the special figure change start command has been received (YES in S4305), the effect content of the special figure change effect is determined. , The special figure variation effect start process (S4306) for starting the special figure variation effect is performed.

In the special figure variation effect start process, the effect control microcomputer 121 first stores the special figure variation start command in the special figure variation start command storage unit 127 in the effect RAM 124. Next, the effect symbol EZ1 to be stopped and displayed based on the content of the stop special symbol (type of jackpot symbol, lost special symbol) indicated by the symbol designation command already stored in step S4304 and the special symbol variation pattern indicated by the special symbol variation start command. -EZ3 and the stop symbol pattern determination table for determining the stop symbol for determining the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are selected. A plurality of stop symbol pattern determination tables are provided in association with the special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one stop symbol pattern determination table associated with the stop special figure and the special figure fluctuation pattern. In each stop symbol pattern determination table, a random number value for stop symbol pattern determination (stop symbol pattern determination) is set for a plurality of effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Value) is distributed. Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the stop symbol pattern determination random number counter as a stop symbol pattern determination random number, and performs stop symbol pattern determination based on the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random number.

In the stop symbol pattern determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired stop symbol pattern determination random numbers with the selected stop symbol pattern table, and determines the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 to be stopped and displayed. Then, the data representing the determined effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 are set in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation without reach, a combination of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to have a so-called “separate stitch”. If the special symbol variation pattern is a loss variation with reach, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the same, and the middle effect symbol EZ2 is different from them. The combination of KZ3 is selected. Further, if the special symbol variation pattern is a jackpot variation, a combination of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 is selected so as to have so-called "doublets" according to the effect mode and the type of the jackpot symbol. ..

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 creates a special figure variation effect pattern in which the effect content of the special figure variation effect is associated with the effect mode in which the effect is staying and the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation start command. Select the special figure variation effect pattern determination table for determining the special figure variation effect pattern to be determined. A plurality of special figure variation effect pattern determination tables are provided in association with the effect mode and the special figure variation pattern. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 selects one special figure variation effect pattern determination table associated with the special figure variation pattern. In each special figure variation effect pattern determination table, one or a plurality of special figure variation effect pattern has a random number value for determining the special figure variation effect pattern (special figure variation effect pattern) so as to have a predetermined distribution rate (%). Judgment value) is distributed. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 acquires the value indicated by the random number counter for determining the special figure variation effect pattern as a random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern, and the special figure is based on the acquired random number for determining the special figure variation effect pattern. The variation effect pattern is judged.

The effect control microcomputer 121 collates the acquired special figure variation effect pattern determination random number with the selected special figure variation effect pattern table in the special figure variation effect pattern determination, and determines and determines the special figure variation effect pattern. The data representing the special figure variation effect pattern is set in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, the special figure variation effect start command indicating the special figure variation effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and the special figure variation effect is produced. The special figure variation effect data indicating the pattern is set (overwritten) in a predetermined area of the effect RAM 124.

When the special figure variation effect start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is predetermined from the image ROM 142. The effect image of the above is read out, and the special figure variation effect is performed by the image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

Further, in addition to the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image display device 50, the special figure variation effect start command includes the special figure variation effect by the voice output from the speaker 52 and the special figure variation effect by the light emission performed by the frame lamp 53. The effect content of the figure variation effect and the effect content of the special figure variation effect by the operation performed by the movable board 55k are included.

Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, while the special figure variation effect by the image performed by the image control board 140 is being performed, the special figure variation effect content indicated by the special figure variation effect start command transmitted to the image control board 140. In response to this, the speaker 52 outputs the sound via the voice control circuit 161 (executes the special figure variation effect by the voice), and the frame lamp 53 emits light via the sub drive board 162 (the special figure by the light emission). (Execute the variation effect) and operate the board movable body 55k (execute the special figure variation effect by the operation).

In step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the special figure fluctuation stop command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the special figure fluctuation stop command (NO in S4307), the process proceeds to step S4309, while if the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received (YES in S4307), the special figure change. A special symbol variation effect end process (S4308) is performed to end the effect (stop the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 and perform the stop display).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the special figure variation stop command in the special figure variation effect end process, and appropriately ends the special figure variation effect based on the analysis result (effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, and small symbol KZ1). A special figure variation effect end command for stopping the variation display of KZ3 is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the image control board 140 receives the command to end the special symbol variation effect, the image control board 140 ends the special symbol variation effect being executed (stops the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 and the small symbols KZ1 to KZ3 being changed).

In step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game state command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the game state command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the game state command (NO in S4309), the process proceeds to step S4311, while if the game state command has been received (YES in S4309), the effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the game state command. , The game state represented by the game state command is specified, and the game state setting process for setting the game state is performed (S4310).

In the game state setting process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets a game state flag corresponding to the game state indicated by the game state command in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. For example, if the game state indicated by the game state command is the normal game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “00H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. Further, if the game state indicated by the game state command is a high-probability high-base game state, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag “01H” in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the game state flag "02H" in the game state flag area of the effect RAM 124 if the game state indicated by the game state command is a low-probability high-base game state.

In step S4311, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the customer waiting command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the customer waiting command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the customer waiting command (NO in S4311), the process proceeds to step S4313, while if the effect waiting command has been received (YES in S4311), the effect waiting effect waiting process is performed. (S4312), the received command analysis process is completed.

In the customer waiting effect standby process, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the waiting time (customer waiting effect waiting time:, for example, 20 seconds) from the stop display of the effect symbol to the start of the customer waiting effect. Set in the timer. The effect control microcomputer 121 can determine whether or not the waiting time has elapsed, and when it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed, the effect RAM 124 issues a customer waiting effect start command for starting the customer waiting effect. Set in the output buffer of.

In step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the opening command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the opening command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the opening command (NO in S4313), it proceeds to step S4315, while if it has received the opening command (YES in S4313), the jackpot game accompanies the start of the jackpot game. The opening staging start process is performed (S4314).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the opening command in the jackpot opening effect start process, and determines whether or not to execute the jackpot opening effect according to the opening of the jackpot game to be executed from now on based on the analysis result. If you want to execute it, select the effect content of the jackpot opening effect (big hit opening effect pattern), and output the jackpot opening effect start command to start the jackpot opening effect with the selected jackpot opening effect pattern of the effect RAM 124. Set in the buffer.

In step S4315, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the game control board 100 has received the round number designation command, in other words, whether or not the round number designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the round number designation command has not been received (NO in S4315), the process proceeds to step S4317, while if the round number designation command has been received (YES in S4315), the round effect start process accompanying the start of the round game is performed. (S4316).

The staging control microcomputer 121 analyzes the round number designation command in the round staging start process, determines whether or not to execute the round staging according to the round game to be started, and if so, the round staging. The effect content (round effect pattern) of is selected, and the round effect start command corresponding to the selected round effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

In step S4317, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the ending command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the ending command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the ending command has not been received (NO in S4317), the process proceeds to step S4320, while if the ending command has been received (YES in S4317), the jackpot ending effect start process (S4318) accompanying the start of the ending of the jackpot game. , And the effect mode setting process (S4319).

The effect control microcomputer 121 analyzes the ending command in the jackpot ending effect start process, determines whether or not to execute the jackpot ending effect according to the ending of the jackpot game to be executed, and if it is executed. The effect content of the jackpot ending effect (big hit ending effect pattern) is selected, and the jackpot ending effect start command corresponding to the selected jackpot ending effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode after the jackpot game based on the analysis result of the ending command, specifically, the jackpot symbol indicated by the ending command in the effect mode setting process (effect mode). Process to control).

For example, if the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol A or the jackpot symbol D, the effect control microcomputer 121 is set to the probability variation effect mode suggesting a high probability and high base game state. Then, the effect mode flag indicating the probability change effect mode is turned on in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124, and the probability change effect mode start command indicating that the probability change effect mode is set is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. When the probability variation effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending is completed. , The probability variation background image G120 is displayed as the background image, and the probability variation BGM is output as the BGM.

Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, when the jackpot symbol indicated by the jackpot ending command is the jackpot symbol B, the jackpot symbol C, the jackpot symbol E, or the jackpot symbol F, the high-probability high-base gaming state or the low-probability high-base Set a time saving effect mode in which it is difficult or impossible to determine which of the game states it is. Then, the staging control microcomputer 121 turns on the staging mode flag indicating the staging mode in a predetermined area of the staging RAM 124, and issues a time saving mode start command indicating that the staging mode is set to the output buffer of the staging RAM 124. Set to. When the time saving effect mode start command set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 is transmitted to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process (S4004), the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 is at the timing when the ending is completed. , The time-saving background image G130 is displayed as the background image, and the time-saving BGM is output as the BGM.

In step S4320, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not the set value designation command has been received from the game control board 100, in other words, whether or not the set value designation command has been stored in the reception buffer. If the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the set value specification command (NO in S4320), it finishes the received command analysis process, while it has received the set value specification command (YES in S4320), the set value is specified. The set value setting process for storing the set value flag representing the set value indicated by the command in the set value flag storage unit 128 in the effect RAM 124 is performed (S4321), and the received command analysis process is completed.

<First Embodiment>
Next, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine PY of the basic embodiment of the present invention. In the following, mainly, the first embodiment will be described as different from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment includes a cross button 42k in addition to the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k as an operation means that can be operated by the player. As shown in FIG. 50, the cross-shaped button 42k is arranged to the left of the first effect button 40k on the upper surface of the upper plate 34, and is configured to be pressable like the first effect button 40k.

The cross-shaped button 42k is formed in a disk shape as a whole, but includes a part formed in the shape of a "10" in the center of the plane, and the part is divided into upper, lower, left, and right parts. An operation unit 42ku that has an upper operation unit 42ku located on the upper side, a lower operation unit 42kd located on the lower side, a right operation unit 42kr located on the right side, and a left operation unit 42kl located on the left side, and constitutes a cross button 42k. , 42kd, 42kr, and 42kl are configured to be independently pressable. In the following, the upper operation unit 42ku and the lower operation unit 42kd of the cross button 42k are collectively referred to as "up / down button 42k1", and the right operation unit 42kr and the left operation unit 42kl of the cross button 42k are collectively "left and right". Button 42k2 "collectively.

Further, the cross-shaped button 42k is connected to the cross-shaped button sensor 42a. As shown in FIG. 51, the cross-shaped button sensor 42a is also connected to the staging control board 120 in the same manner as the first staging button sensor 40a. The cross-shaped button 42k and the cross-shaped button sensor 42a are integrally configured, and the cross-shaped button 42k and the cross-shaped button sensor 42a are collectively referred to as a "cross-shaped button device 42".

Which part of the cross-shaped button sensor 42a related to the operation of the cross-shaped button 42k, specifically, which of the upper operation unit 42ku, the lower operation unit 42kd, the right operation unit 42kr, and the left operation unit 42kl was pressed. Can be detected. In other words, the cross-shaped button sensor 42a has an upper operation unit sensor 42au that detects an operation on the upper operation unit 42ku, a lower operation unit sensor 42ad that detects an operation on the lower operation unit 42kd, and an operation on the right operation unit 42kr. It has a right operation unit sensor 42ar for detecting the above, and a left operation unit sensor 42al for detecting an operation on the left operation unit 42kl.

When each operation unit sensor 42au, 42ad, 42ar, 42al detects an operation on each operation unit 42ku, 42kd, 42kr, 42kl, a signal indicating that the operation is performed on that portion is performed as a detection content (upper operation unit). The detection signal, the lower operation unit detection signal, the right operation unit detection signal, and the left operation unit detection signal) are output to the staging control board 120. In the following, the upper operation unit sensor 42au and the lower operation unit sensor 42ad of the cross button sensor 42a are collectively referred to as "up / down button sensor 42a1", and the right operation unit sensor 42ar and the left operation unit sensor of the cross button 42k. 42al are collectively referred to as "left and right button sensors 42a2".

Further, in the first embodiment, during a game in which a game control microcomputer 101 such as a special figure variation display or a jackpot game is performed, and in a non-game in which a game control microcomputer 101 is not performed, the game is performed. By operating the cross button 42k or the first effect button 40k, the volume of the sound output from the speaker 52 and the amount of light emitted from the frame lamp 53 and the light emitted from the image display device 50 are changed. Is configured to be possible.

In the first embodiment, both the volume and the amount of light can be changed between the six stages of the minimum stage "1" and the maximum stage "6". However, the number of stages and the name of the stage can be changed as appropriate. Further, the number of steps of the volume and the amount of light do not necessarily have to be the same, and the number of steps of the volume and the number of steps of the amount of light may be different.

For example, the volume can be changed during the game by operating the left and right buttons 42k2, and when the left operation unit 42kl of the left and right buttons 42k2 is operated, the volume is reduced by one step and the right operation unit 42kr of the left and right buttons 42k2. When you operate, the volume increases by one step. However, even if the left operation unit 42kl is operated while the volume is set to the minimum stage "1", the volume is not changed and the stage "1" is maintained. Similarly, even if the right operation unit 42kr is operated while the volume is set to the maximum stage "6", the volume is not changed and the stage "6" is maintained.

Further, the amount of light can be changed during the game by operating the up / down button 42k1, and when the lower operation unit 42kd of the up / down button 42k1 is operated, the amount of light is reduced by one step and the upper operation unit 42ku of the up / down button 42k1 is operated. When you operate, the amount of light increases by one step. However, even if the lower operation unit 42kd is operated while the light amount is set to the minimum step "1", the light amount is not changed and the step "1" is maintained. Similarly, even if the upper operation unit 42ku is operated when the light amount is set to the maximum stage "6", the light amount is not changed and the stage "6" is maintained.

The operation method for changing the volume and the amount of light can be appropriately set. Further, when the volume is changed by operating the left and right buttons 42k2, the volume is switched to the changed volume immediately after that. For example, if the volume is changed while the sound is being output from the speaker 52, the volume is switched while the sound is being output. Further, when the light amount is changed by operating the up / down button 42k1, the light amount is switched to the changed light amount immediately after that. Further, if the amount of light is changed while the image is being emitted from the image display device 50 or the frame lamp 53 is being emitted, the amount of light is switched in the state of being emitted.

The volume and the amount of light are changed by the effect control microcomputer 121. The effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is provided with a volume storage unit 129 for storing the volume and a light amount storage unit 130 for storing the light amount.

Further, when the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the volume, the sound is output from the speaker 52 based on the volume stored in the volume storage unit 129, and the image is displayed on the image display device 50 or the frame lamp 53. When emitting light from the speaker, an image is displayed or emitted based on the amount of light stored in the light amount storage unit 130.

Next, the voice effect executed in the normal effect mode related to the normal game state will be described. In the first embodiment, as described in the basic embodiment, in the normal staging mode, the first normal staging stage → the second normal staging stage → the third normal staging stage → the first staging stage → ... , The first normal production stage, the second normal production stage, and the third normal production stage are switched in order.

Then, in the front stage portion of the first normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111 (FIG. 18 (A)) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and in the front stage portion of the second normal effect stage, on the display unit 50a. The second normal background image G112 (FIG. 18 (B)) is displayed, and the third normal background image G113 (FIG. 18 (C)) is displayed on the display unit 50a in the front stage portion of the third normal effect stage. To. On the other hand, in the latter part of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage, the first normal background image G111, the second normal background image G112, and the third normal background image G113 are not displayed, and the normal effect mode is used. A dedicated background image (L reach background image G114 or SP reach background image G115) corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

As described above, for the front part of the first normal production stage to the third normal production stage, the background image according to the type of the normal production mode (first normal production stage, second normal production stage, third normal production stage). Is displayed on the display unit 50a, while a background image according to the type of reach (L reach, SP reach) is displayed on the display unit 50a for the rear portion of the first normal effect stage to the third normal effect stage. .. Similarly, with respect to the sound, the types of the normal production mode (first normal production stage, second normal production stage, third normal production stage) are used for the front part of the first normal production stage to the third normal production stage. While background music (background music: BGM) corresponding to the above is output from the speaker 52, the type of reach (first normal staging stage, second normal staging stage, second normal staging stage) is used for the latter part of the first normal staging stage to the third staging stage. The BGM corresponding to the staging stage and the third normal staging stage) is output from the speaker 52.

In the following, the BGM of the front stage portion in the normal staging mode is referred to as "normal front stage BGM", and the BGM of the rear stage portion in the normal staging mode is referred to as "normal rear stage BGM". Regarding the normal front stage BGM, the normal front stage BGM corresponding to the first normal production stage is referred to as "first normal front stage BGM", and the normal front stage BGM corresponding to the second normal production stage is referred to as "normal front stage BGM". The BGM for the second normal front stage is referred to as "BGM for the second normal front stage", and the BGM for the normal front stage corresponding to the third normal staging stage is referred to as "BGM for the third normal front stage". Further, regarding the normal rear stage BGM, the normal rear stage BGM corresponding to the L reach is referred to as "normal L reach BGM", and the normal rear stage BGM corresponding to the SP reach is referred to as "normal SP reach BGM". Refer to.

Next, the BGM for the normal front stage will be described. As described above, the normal front stage BGM includes a first normal front stage BGM, a second normal front stage BGM, and a third normal front stage BGM, depending on the type of normal staging mode, but is usually a front stage BGM. As its own method, a non-loop type that is composed of several times longer time than the special figure fluctuation time related to the SP fluctuation pattern with the longest special figure fluctuation time and is reproduced seamlessly across multiple special figure fluctuation effects, and 1 There is a loop type that is completed in the first part of the special figure fluctuation production of the times. Therefore, in detail, as the first normal front stage BGM, a non-loop type first normal front stage BGM (non-loop first normal front stage BGM) and a loop type first normal front stage BGM (loop first normal stage BGM). BGM for the front stage), and as the second normal front stage BGM, there are a non-loop type second normal front stage BGM (non-loop second normal front stage BGM) and a loop type second normal front stage BGM (loop). There are 2nd normal front stage BGM), and as the 3rd normal front stage BGM, there are a non-loop type 3rd normal front stage BGM (non-loop 3rd normal front stage BGM) and a loop type 3rd normal front stage BGM. There is a BGM (BGM for the third normal front stage of the loop).

The non-loop first normal front stage BGM, the non-loop second normal front stage BGM, and the non-loop third normal front stage BGM are composed of different songs. Similarly, the loop 1st normal pre-stage BGM, the loop 2nd normal pre-stage BGM, and the loop 3rd normal pre-stage BGM are also composed of different songs. In the following, the non-loop first normal front stage BGM, the non-loop second normal front stage BGM, and the non-loop third normal front stage BGM are referred to as "non-loop normal front stage BGM", and the loop first normal stage BGM is referred to as "non-loop normal front stage BGM". The BGM for the front stage, the BGM for the second normal front stage of the loop, and the BGM for the third normal front stage of the loop are referred to as "BGM for the normal front stage of the loop".

Basically, once the non-loop normal front stage BGM is played back, it continues to be output even after the special figure fluctuation display ends. Therefore, unless the special figure variation effect related to the L reach variation or the SP reach variation is executed while the non-loop normal front stage BGM is output, the normal front stage BGM spans a plurality of special figure variation effects. Will be executed. However, once the L reach or SP reach is started, the non-loop normal front stage BGM is switched to the normal L reach BGM or the normal SP reach BGM once. Then, when the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 related to the loss is performed in the L reach or SP reach, the normal L reach BGM or the normal SP reach BGM related to the normal effect stage is switched to the non-loop normal front stage BGM. .. However, when switching to the non-loop normal front stage BGM, the non-loop normal front stage BGM may be started from the beginning, or may be started from the place where the normal L reach BGM or the normal SP reach BGM is switched. .. In addition, in the situation where the special figure fluctuation effect is completed but there is no special figure hold and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed without performing a new special figure variation effect, a non-loop is performed until the demo effect is started. Normally, the BGM for the previous stage continues to be output. It should be noted that the songs themselves that make up each non-loop normal pre-stage BGM are provided with time. Then, as soon as the song as the non-loop normal pre-stage BGM ends, it starts from the beginning. The time of the songs that make up each non-loop normal pre-stage BGM is not particularly limited, but basically, while the song is playing, there are multiple special figure fluctuation effects where L reach and SP reach are not performed. It is configured to run repeatedly. Therefore, for example, the time of the music constituting each non-loop normal front stage BGM is about 3 to 5 minutes. It should be noted that the times of the songs constituting each non-loop normal pre-stage BGM may be the same or different.

On the other hand, the BGM for the normal front stage of the loop is started from the beginning every time the special figure variation display is started, and the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in the special map variation effect related to the non-reach variation, or reach. It ends when it develops into L reach or SP reach by the special figure change effect related to the existence change. It should be noted that the music itself that constitutes the BGM for the normal front stage of each loop also has time. The time of the songs that make up the BGM for the previous stage of each loop is not particularly limited, but basically, at least from the start of the special figure fluctuation effect to the start of the L reach or SP reach, it is sufficiently 1 It is composed to the extent that one song can be continued. Therefore, for example, the time of the music constituting the BGM for the normal front stage of each loop is about 1 to 2 minutes. It should be noted that the times of the songs constituting the BGM for the normal front stage of each loop may be the same or different.

As described above, the non-loop type and the loop type are usually provided as the method of the front stage BGM, but the method is basically set according to the set value for the normal front stage BGM. That is, when the set value is set to an odd number (1, 3, 5), the BGM for the loop normal front stage is output, and when the set value is set to an even number (2, 4, 6), the loop is normal. The BGM for the previous stage is output.

However, in the second normal effect stage in the normal effect mode, when the highest setting value "5" among the odd numbers (1, 3, 5) is set, it is for the second normal stage of the loop. The BGM may be switched to the non-loop second normal front stage BGM, and if the highest setting value "6" is set among the even numbers (2, 4, 6), the non-loop second normal front stage is set. BGM may be switched to the loop second normal front stage BGM. In other words, in the second normal staging stage, there is a possibility that the background music method is switched (background music method switching) based on the set value.

Next, "background music system switching" in the second normal staging stage will be described. The background music system switching in the second normal staging stage is performed by the staging control microcomputer 121. When the effect control microcomputer 121 receives, for example, the special figure variation stop command, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a process related to background music system switching (background music system switching process) after completing the special figure variation effect end process in step S4308.

The effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the second normal effect stage is set in the background music method switching process. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the second normal effect stage is not set, the effect control microcomputer 121 finishes the background music method switching process and returns the process to the reception command analysis process, and determines that the second normal effect stage is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the set value "5" or the set value "6" is set. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value "5" or the set value "6" is not set, the process returns to the reception command analysis process after finishing the background music method switching process, and the set value "5". If it is determined that the set value "6" is set, then it is determined whether or not the background music system is currently switched.

As will be described later, when the "background music method switching" is currently performed, that is, the BGM for the second normal front stage of the loop is flowing, but the BGM for the second normal front stage of the loop is flowing. Alternatively, when the non-loop second normal front stage BGM should be flowing but the loop second normal front stage BGM is flowing, it indicates that "background music method switching" is performed in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. The background music method switching flag is ON. Then, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the "background music method switching" has been performed, the background music method switching process is completed and the process is returned to the reception command analysis process, and the "background music method switching" is performed. If it is determined that the background music system has not been switched, then a background music system switching determination is performed to determine whether or not to perform "background music system switching".

The background music method switching determination is executed with reference to the background music method switching determination table. The background music method switching determination table is stored in the staging ROM 123. FIG. 52A shows a configuration example of the background music method switching determination table. The background music method switching determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the "background music method switching" is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 52 (A). In the first embodiment, the selection rate for executing "background music method switching" is set to "5%", and the selection rate for not executing "background music method switching" is set to "95%". Has been done.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the background music is switched by the background music system switching determination, the background music system switching flag is turned on in the predetermined area of the effect RAM 124. Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, when the set value "5" is set, when the special symbol confirmation time elapses after starting the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, the loop second normal first stage. Switch from the BGM for the non-loop second normal stage to the BGM for the previous stage. Further, in the effect control microcomputer 121, when the set value "6" is set, the non-loop second normal is performed when the special symbol confirmation time elapses after the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is started. The BGM for the previous stage is switched to the loop second normal BGM for the previous stage.

Once the "background music method switching" is performed, the non-loop second normal front stage BGM or the loop second normal front stage BGM after the switching is left as it is until the second normal production stage is completed. Continues to be output. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the background music method switching flag when the switching condition for switching the above-mentioned normal effect stage is satisfied and the next third normal effect stage is set. Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 turns off the background music system switching flag when the jackpot is won and the jackpot game starts in the second normal effect stage. Then, when the "background music method switching" is performed and the second normal production stage is completed, the next new second normal production stage outputs a BGM for the second normal front stage in a format according to the set value. ..

Next, the "switching of volume based on the set value" that can be executed in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. As described above, in the first embodiment, "1" to "6" are provided as the volume related to the sound output from the speaker 52. Then, in the first embodiment, when the set value "6" is set, the player does not operate the left / right button 42k2 when the volume is set to less than the volume "6" in the normal effect mode. Nevertheless, the volume of the normal L reach BGM related to the L reach or the normal SP reach BGM related to the SP reach may be automatically switched to the volume "6" during the execution of the L reach or the SP reach. be. Further, when the set value "5" is set, if the volume is set to less than the volume "5" in the normal effect mode, the player does not operate the left / right button 42k2, but L During the execution of reach or SP reach, the volume of the normal L reach BGM related to the L reach or the normal SP reach BGM related to the SP reach may be automatically switched to the volume "5". In the following, switching the volume based on the set value is referred to as "automatic volume switching". Further, there is a possibility that automatic volume switching is performed, and the L reach and SP reach that are the targets of the automatic volume switching may be referred to as "automatic volume switching target effect".

Here, "automatic volume switching" in the normal production mode will be described. "Volume switching" in the normal effect mode is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121. For example, in step S4012, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a process related to automatic volume switching (automatic volume switching process) after the light emission data creation process in step S4203.

The effect control microcomputer 121 first determines whether or not the normal effect mode is set in the automatic volume switching process. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the normal effect mode is not set, the automatic volume switching process is completed and the process returns to the 10 ms timer interrupt process. When it is determined that the normal effect mode is set, the next step is , The set value flag is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the set value "5" or the set value "6" is set.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value "5" or the set value "6" is not set, the automatic volume switching process is completed and the process is returned to the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the set value "5" or the set value "6" is set. When it is determined that the set value "6" is set, next, the special figure fluctuation start command and the special figure fluctuation effect data are confirmed, and L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switching target effect) is performed. It is determined whether or not the variation effect is executed.

When the staging control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation staging in which L reach or SP reach (staging for automatic volume switching) is not executed, the staging control microcomputer 121 finishes the automatic volume switching process and processes the 10 ms timer interrupt process. When it is determined that the special figure fluctuation effect in which the return, L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switching target effect) is performed, the predetermined timing in the L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switch target effect) ( For example, it is determined whether or not it is (when 10 seconds have passed since the start of L reach or SP reach). For example, when the set value "5" or the set value "6" is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a predetermined control process when the special figure variation effect in which L reach or SP reach is performed is started. Measures the elapsed time from the start time to a predetermined timing in L reach or SP reach.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the timing is not the predetermined timing in the L reach or SP reach (automatic volume switching target effect), the effect control microcomputer 121 finishes the automatic volume switching process and returns the process to the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and the L reach or SP. When it is determined that the timing is the predetermined timing in the reach (effect for automatic volume switching), next, whether or not the volume capable of performing automatic volume switching is set, and in detail, the setting value "5" is set. If it is, it is determined whether or not a volume other than the volume "5" is set, and when the set value "6" is set, it is determined whether or not a volume other than the volume "6" is set.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the volume capable of performing automatic volume switching is not set, the effect control microcomputer 121 can finish the automatic volume switching process, return the process to the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and perform automatic volume switching. When it is determined that the volume is set, the automatic volume switching determination for determining whether or not to perform the "automatic volume switching" is performed next. The automatic volume switching determination is executed with reference to the automatic volume switching determination table. The automatic volume switching determination table is stored in the effect ROM 123. FIG. 52B shows a configuration example of the automatic volume switching determination table. The automatic volume switching determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the "automatic volume switching" is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 52 (B). In the first embodiment, the selection rate for executing "automatic volume switching" is set to "10%", and the selection rate for not executing "automatic volume switching" is set to "90%". There is.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the automatic volume switching is executed by the automatic volume switching determination, if the setting value "5" is set, the setting value "5" is switched to the volume "5" and the setting value "6" is set. If so, switch to volume "6". When the volume of the set value volume switching target effect is switched to the volume "5" or the volume "6", the switching of the volume is effective only in the special figure variation effect. That is, after the special figure variation effect is completed, the voice effect at the volume at which the switching is performed is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment, the style of the background music may be switched based on the set value in the second normal staging stage. Therefore, in general, background music is less likely to be of interest to the player than a staging that suggests that it may be a big hit, but by that amount, the style of the background music is switched to the player. It makes you feel uncomfortable and suggests the set value with a new feeling, so you can improve the taste of the game. In addition, it is difficult to notice that the style of the background music is switched, and a high degree of attention and knowledge is required to notice it, so that the player can feel the superiority complex that he / she was able to notice only by himself / herself. Furthermore, the preset background music style differs depending on the set value, and when the background music of each style is output, the background music of the other style may be switched to based on the set value. , It is possible to prevent the background music system from getting tired of switching and to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

Furthermore, the automatic volume switching target effects such as L reach and SP reach have a higher expectation of big hits and a longer production time than the normal fluctuations and N reach that compose the preceding part in the special figure fluctuation effect, so in general. In the production, the player tends to stop firing the game ball and concentrate on the production. In such a situation, the automatic volume switching is executed based on the set value, so that the player can easily notice the volume switching based on the set value. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the game entertainment.

(Example of modification of the first embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to the first embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, basically, the loop type background music is set when the set value is odd, and the non-loop type background music is set when the set value is even. However, the set value and the background are set. The relationship with the music format is not limited and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the non-loop type background music may be set when the setting value is odd, and the loop type background music may be set when the setting value is even. Further, in any set value, the non-loop type background music may be set and switched to the loop type based on the set value. Alternatively, the loop type background music may be set regardless of the set value, and the music may be switched to the non-loop type based on the set value.

Further, in the first embodiment, the background music method is switched in the second normal effect stage in the normal effect mode, but the type of the effect mode in which the background music method is switched is not limited and is appropriately changed. Is also good. The background music system may be switched in either or any of the first normal production stage and the third normal production stage, which are other production modes in the normal production mode. Alternatively, the background music system may be switched in the entire normal production mode. Further, the background music system may be switched for the probability variation effect mode related to the high-probability high-base game state and the time-saving effect mode related to the high-base game state.

Further, the probability (selection rate) of determining that the background music method switching is executed in the background music method switching determination is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. Further, the probability (selection rate) of determining that the background music method switching is executed may be different between the case of the set value "5" and the case of the set value "6". For example, in order to make it easier to switch the background music method when the setting value is "6" which is advantageous to the player, the background music method switching is performed when the setting value is "6" rather than when the setting value is "5". It may be possible to increase the probability that it will be determined to execute.

Further, in the first embodiment, the background music method switching can be executed when the setting value "5" and the setting value "6" are relatively advantageous to the player, but the background music method switching can be executed. The set value is not limited to the first embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, when the setting value "1" and the setting value "2" are relatively disadvantageous to the player, the background music system switching may be executed. Alternatively, the background music system switching may be executed when the setting value "1" is the most disadvantageous to the player and the setting value "6" is the most advantageous to the player. Alternatively, the background music system switching may be executed when the setting value is "2", which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and when the setting value is "5", which is relatively advantageous to the player.

Further, in the first embodiment, for the background music, a loop type and a non-loop type are set as the method related to the game so that the method can be switched, but even if the target is set to a production other than the background music. good. For example, the loop type and the non-loop type may be set for the background image displayed on the display unit 50a and the frame lamp 53 so that the method can be switched. Furthermore, the method related to the game is not the loop type and the non-loop type related to the effect, but other method contents such as a manual method involving the operation of the operation effect related to the operation validity period and an automatic method without the operation. You may set it.

Further, in the first embodiment, the automatic volume switching can be executed basically in the L reach and the SP reach, but the effect in which the automatic volume switching can be executed, that is, the effect for which the automatic volume switching is performed is not limited to these. It may be changed as appropriate. For example, it may be possible to execute automatic volume switching in normal fluctuation or N reach. Further, the automatic volume switching may be executed in any one or any of the jackpot game effect, more specifically, the opening effect, the round effect, and the ending effect. Furthermore, there is a so-called "dish full tank error" that suggests that the lower plate 35 is full of game balls, and a so-called "right-handed error" that is performed by hitting right in a normal game state where basic left-handed hitting is performed. In error notification such as ", automatic volume switching may be executed.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the setting value "5" and the setting value "6" are relatively advantageous to the player, the automatic volume switching can be executed, but the automatic volume switching can be executed. Is not limited to the first embodiment, and can be appropriately changed. For example, the automatic volume switching may be enabled only when the setting value "6" is most advantageous to the player. Alternatively, the automatic volume switching may be executed when the set value "1" and the set value "2" are relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this case, if the set value is "1", the volume may be switched to "1", and if the set value is "2", the volume may be switched to "2". Alternatively, the automatic volume switching may be enabled when the setting value "1" is the most disadvantageous to the player and the setting value "6" is the most advantageous to the player. In this case, if the set value is "1", the volume may be switched to "1", and if the set value is "6", the volume may be switched to "6". Further, the automatic volume switching may be executed when the set value "4" to the set value "6" which is relatively advantageous to the player.

Further, the relationship between the set value and the volume related to the automatic volume switching is not limited to the first embodiment and can be appropriately changed. For example, the volume may be switched to "6" in both the case of the set value "5" and the case of the set value "6". That is, it may be suggested that the setting value "5" or the setting value "6" which is advantageous to the player is set by switching to the volume "6". Further, it may be suggested that the setting value "5" or the setting value "6" which is advantageous to the player is set by switching to the volume "1". In addition, when the setting value "1" and the setting value "2" are relatively disadvantageous to the player, the automatic volume switching can be executed and the volume is switched to "6", which is disadvantageous to the player. It may be suggested that the value "1" or the set value "2" is set. Further, the volume is not limited to 6 levels in the first place and may be changed as appropriate. Then, for example, it may be suggested that the setting value "5" or the setting value "6" which is advantageous to the player is set by switching to the highest level volume. Alternatively, it may be suggested that the setting value "1" or the setting value "2", which is disadvantageous to the player, is set by switching to the lowest volume.

Further, the probability (selection rate) of determining that the automatic volume switching is executed in the set value volume switching determination is not limited to the first embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. Further, the probability (selection rate) determined to execute the automatic volume switching may be different between the case of the set value "5" and the case of the set value "6". For example, in order to make it easier to execute automatic volume switching when the setting value is "6" which is advantageous to the player, automatic volume switching is executed when the setting value is "6" than when the setting value is "5". Then, the probability of being determined may be high.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment of the present invention. In the following, mainly, as the second embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment, the first effect button 40k that can be operated by the player is configured to be vibrable. Although detailed structural description of vibrating the first effect button 40k is omitted, a motor 40 m for the first effect button that vibrates the first effect button 40k is installed inside the upper plate 34. The motor 40m for the first effect button is composed of a motor.

FIG. 53 shows a block diagram on the production side according to the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the first effect button motor 40 m is connected to the effect control board 120. That is, the first effect button motor 40 m constitutes various actuators connected to the effect control board 120. The rotation of the motor 40m for the first effect button causes the first effect button 40k to vibrate.

The effect control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operation mode of the first effect button 40k, similar to the operation control for the rotating member 55k1 and the elevating member 55k2, and creates the operation pattern data via the sub drive board 162 for the first effect. Controls the operation of the button 40k.

Then, in the second embodiment, the vibration of the first effect button 40k and the sound output from the speaker 52 are used to suggest a set value and an effect suggesting that there is a possibility of a big hit. In the following, an effect that suggests a set value and that there is a possibility of a big hit is referred to as a “hybrid effect”. Therefore, the hybrid effect has both a set value suggestion effect that suggests information about the set value and a notice effect that suggests that there is a possibility of a big hit.

The hybrid effect may be executed when the special figure hold occurs, or may be executed when the special figure variation effect starts. The mode of the hybrid effect is different depending on whether it is executed when the special figure hold occurs or when the special figure variation effect starts. In the following, the hybrid effect executed when the special figure hold occurs is referred to as "look-ahead hybrid effect", and the hybrid effect executed at the start of the special figure variation effect is referred to as "the hybrid effect".

The look-ahead hybrid effect is executed only when the set value "6" is set. That is, the look-ahead hybrid effect is an effect that suggests that the set value "6" is set. Further, as will be described later, the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed based on the look-ahead determination result indicated by the start winning command. Then, the execution of the look-ahead hybrid effect is determined to be a big hit by the big hit judgment based on the special figure hold corresponding to the start winning command (the big hit special symbol is stopped and displayed by the special figure variable display), and the big hit game is performed. It also suggests that it may be done.

The hybrid effect is executed regardless of which set value is set, and suggests information about a predetermined set value according to the effect content. Further, as will be described later, the hybrid effect is executed based on the special figure change pattern determination result indicated by the special figure change start command. The execution of the hybrid effect also suggests that the jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed in the special figure variable display corresponding to the special figure change start command, and the jackpot game may be executed.

Next, the contents of the hybrid production will be described. 54, 55, and 56 are diagrams schematically showing the production contents of various hybrid effects. Note that FIG. 54 is a diagram schematically showing the effect content of the look-ahead hybrid effect, and FIGS. 55 and 56 are diagrams schematically showing the effect content of the hybrid effect.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the look-ahead hybrid effect, the first effect button 40k vibrates for a relatively long time, and a predetermined electronic sound is output from the speaker 52. Specifically, in the look-ahead hybrid effect, when the first effect button 40k intermittently vibrates for a relatively long time (hereinafter referred to as "long vibration") six times, and each long vibration is performed. In addition, "voice corresponding to long vibration (long vibration voice)" representing long vibration is output from the speaker 52. In the second embodiment, the vibration time related to the long vibration is set to "2 seconds", and the interval between each long vibration is set to "1 second" in the look-ahead hybrid effect. In addition, the long vibration voice is composed of an electronic sound called "Bururururururu".

In the hybrid effect, the first effect button 40k vibrates for a relatively short time (short vibration), and the speaker 52 outputs "sound corresponding to the short vibration (short vibration sound)" representing the short vibration. Then, as the effect type associated with the effect content of the hybrid effect, there are a first effect type and a second effect type. In the following, the hybrid effect of the first effect type will be referred to as "first hybrid effect", and the hybrid effect of the second effect type will be referred to as "second hybrid effect".

The first hybrid effect is executed regardless of which set value is set. As shown in FIGS. 55 (A) to 55 (F), in the first hybrid effect, vibration for a relatively short time (hereinafter referred to as “short vibration”) by the first effect button 40k is performed once to 6 times. When any of the times is performed and each short vibration is performed, the sound corresponding to the short vibration (short vibration sound) is output from the speaker 52. That is, the number of short vibrations and the number of vibration sounds are the same. Then, the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds in the first hybrid effect suggests a set value that is likely to be set. Specifically, when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is one, it is most likely that the set value "1" is set. Similarly, if the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is 2, the setting value "2" is most likely to be set, and if the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is 3, it is set. If the value "3" is most likely to be set and the number of short vibrations and vibrations is four, the setting value "4" is most likely to be set and short vibrations and vibrations. If the number of voices is 5, the set value "5" is most likely to be set, and if the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is 6, the set value "6" is set. Most likely.

On the other hand, the second hybrid effect is executed when the set value "2" to the set value "6" is set. As shown in FIGS. 56 (A) to 56 (E), in the second hybrid effect, the short vibration is performed a number of times according to the set value, and the short vibration is performed from the last to the short vibration one time before. At this time, the short vibration sound is output from the speaker 52 in response to the short vibration, but the short vibration sound is not output from the speaker 52 when the final short vibration is performed. That is, the number of short vibrations and the number of vibration sounds do not match. Then, the number of short vibrations in the second hybrid effect informs the set value. Specifically, when the number of short vibrations is 2, the set value "2" is set. Similarly, when the number of short vibrations is 3, the set value "3" is set, and when the number of short vibrations is 4, the set value "4" is set and the short circuit occurs. When the number of vibrations is 5, the set value "5" is set, and when the number of short vibrations is 6, the set value "6" is set.

When the short vibration is performed a plurality of times in the hybrid effect, the short vibration is performed intermittently. Further, in the second embodiment, the vibration time related to the short vibration and the short vibration voice time are set to "1.0 seconds", and in the hybrid production, the interval of each short vibration is "0.5 seconds". Is set to. In addition, the short vibration voice is composed of an electronic sound of "buzz".

Next, a method of deciding whether or not to execute the look-ahead hybrid effect will be described. Whether or not to execute the look-ahead hybrid effect is determined by the look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination. The look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the start winning command has been received in step S4301, it first determines whether or not the hybrid effect or the look-ahead hybrid effect is being executed in the start prize processing in step S4302, and both of them are determined. If it is determined that the command is not executed, the look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination is performed based on the received start winning command. This is to prevent the look-ahead hybrid effect and the hybrid effect from being executed in duplicate, and to prevent the look-ahead hybrid effect from being executed in duplicate.

The look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination is executed with reference to the look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table. The look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table is associated with the special figure variation pattern indicated by the special figure variation pattern information which is the look-ahead determination result. As shown in FIG. 57 (A), as the look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table, a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the SP jackpot variation, a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the L jackpot variation, and a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table. A look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the SP loss variation, a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the L loss variation, a look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the N loss variation, and a normal loss. A look-ahead hybrid staging execution determination table associated with fluctuations is provided. Each look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the look-ahead hybrid effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 57 (A).

According to the look-ahead hybrid effect execution determination table, it may be determined that "the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed" in both the case of the jackpot fluctuation and the case of the loss fluctuation. That is, when the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed, it may be a big hit or a loss. Therefore, it is suggested that the look-ahead hybrid effect may be in the jackpot game state by displaying the stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating the jackpot in the special map fluctuation effect related to the special figure hold indicated by the start winning command. It is a production to do. Further, in both the reach fluctuation and the non-reach fluctuation (normal loss fluctuation), it may be determined that "the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed". That is, when the look-ahead hybrid effect is executed, it may or may not develop into reach. Therefore, the look-ahead hybrid effect is an effect that suggests that the special figure variation effect related to the special figure hold indicated by the start winning command may develop into reach.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that "the look-ahead hybrid effect is to be executed", the first effect button 40k is vibrated for a long time, and a notification sound is output from the speaker 52 to execute the read-ahead hybrid effect.

Next, a method for determining whether or not to execute the hybrid effect, an effect type when the hybrid effect is executed, and a determination of the number of times of short vibration and vibration sound output when the first hybrid effect is executed are determined. The method will be described. Whether or not to execute the hybrid effect is determined by the hybrid effect execution determination. The hybrid effect execution determination is performed by the effect control microcomputer 121. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure variation start command is received in step S4305, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the special figure variation effect start command in the special figure variation effect start process in step S4306, and then the hybrid effect or the look-ahead hybrid effect. If it is determined whether or not is executed, and if it is determined that none of them is executed, the hybrid effect execution determination is performed based on the received special figure variation effect start command. This is to prevent the pre-reading hybrid effect and the hybrid effect from being executed in duplicate, and to prevent the hybrid effect from being executed in duplicate.

The hybrid effect execution determination is executed with reference to the hybrid effect execution determination table. The hybrid effect execution determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure change start command. As shown in FIG. 57 (B), as the hybrid effect execution determination table, the hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the SP jackpot variation, the hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the L jackpot variation, and the hybrid effect execution determination table. The hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the SP loss variation, the hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the L loss variation, the hybrid effect execution determination table associated with the N loss variation, and the normal loss. The hybrid staging execution determination table associated with the fluctuation is provided. Each of the hybrid effect execution determination tables is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the hybrid effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 57 (B).

According to the hybrid effect execution determination table, it may be determined that "the hybrid effect is executed" in both the case of the jackpot variation and the case of the loss variation. That is, when the hybrid effect is executed, it may be a big hit or a loss. Therefore, in the hybrid effect, there is a possibility that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which indicate a big hit in the special figure change effect corresponding to the special figure change start command, are stopped and displayed in the big hit game state. It is a production that suggests that there is. Further, in both the reach fluctuation and the non-reach fluctuation (normal loss fluctuation), it may be determined that "the hybrid effect is executed". That is, when the hybrid effect is executed, it may or may not develop into reach. Therefore, the hybrid effect is an effect that suggests that the special figure variation effect corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure change start command may develop into reach.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that "the hybrid effect is executed" in the hybrid effect execution determination, it determines whether or not the set value "2" to the set value "6" is set. Then, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the set value "2" to the set value "6" is set, the hybrid effect type determination for determining the effect type of the hybrid effect is performed next.

The hybrid effect type determination is executed with reference to the hybrid effect type determination table. The hybrid effect type determination table is associated with the special map fluctuation pattern indicated by the special map variation start command. As shown in FIG. 57 (C), as the hybrid effect type determination table, the hybrid effect type determination table associated with the SP jackpot variation, the hybrid effect type determination table associated with the L jackpot variation, and the hybrid effect type determination table. The hybrid effect type determination table associated with the SP loss variation, the hybrid effect type determination table associated with the L loss variation, the hybrid effect type determination table associated with the N loss variation, and the normal loss. The hybrid effect type determination table associated with the fluctuation is provided. Each of the hybrid effect type determination tables is appropriately set so that the selection rate for each effect type of the hybrid effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 57 (C).

According to the hybrid effect type determination table, it may be determined as "first effect type" or "second effect type" in both the case of jackpot variation and loss variation. That is, no matter which type of effect the hybrid effect is executed, it may be a big hit or a loss. Therefore, in the first hybrid effect and the second hybrid effect, stop display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 indicating a big hit is performed in the special figure change effect corresponding to the special figure change display related to the special figure change start command. It is a production that suggests that there is a possibility of becoming a big hit game state. Further, both in the case of reach variation and non-reach variation (normal loss variation), it may be determined as "first effect type" or "second effect type". That is, when the hybrid effect is executed, it may or may not develop into reach. Therefore, the first hybrid effect and the second hybrid effect are effects that suggest that the special figure variation effect corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure change start command may develop into reach. ..

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the hybrid effect type is the second effect type, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value, and from the start of the special figure variation effect to be started from now on, the second effect corresponding to the set value. The hybrid production is started. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the hybrid effect type is the first effect type, and the set value "2" to the set value "6" is not set before the hybrid effect type determination. Then, the vibration frequency determination for determining the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds in the first hybrid effect is performed.

The vibration frequency determination is executed with reference to the vibration frequency determination table. The vibration frequency determination table is associated with the set value. As shown in FIG. 58, as the vibration frequency determination table, the vibration frequency determination table associated with the set value “6”, the vibration frequency determination table associated with the set value “5”, and the set value “4”. Corresponds to the vibration frequency determination table associated with, the vibration frequency determination table associated with the set value "3", the vibration frequency determination table associated with the set value "2", and the set value "1". A vibration frequency determination table is provided. Each vibration frequency determination table is appropriately set so that the selectivity for the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is a predetermined selectivity shown in FIG. 58.

According to the vibration frequency determination table, when the set value is "6", it may be determined that the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "4" to "6", while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1" to "1". It is not determined to be "3". Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "4" to "6", the set value "6" may be set, while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1" to "3". In the case of "", there is no possibility that the set value "6" is set. Further, when the set value is "6", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "6" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "6", it is highly possible that the set value "6" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the set value is "5", the number of short vibrations and vibration voices may be determined to be "3" to "6", while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1". It is not determined as "2". Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "3" to "6", the set value "5" may be set, while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1" to "2". In the case of "", there is no possibility that the set value "5" is set. Further, when the set value is "5", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "5" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "5", it is highly possible that the set value "5" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the set value is "4", the number of short vibrations and vibration voices may be determined to be "2" to "6", while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1". Is not determined. Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "2" to "6", the set value "4" may be set, while when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1", the set value may be set. There is no possibility that the set value "4" is set. Further, when the set value is "4", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "4" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "4", it is highly possible that the set value "4" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the set value is "3", the number of short vibrations and vibration voices may be determined to be "1" to "5", while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "6". Is not determined. Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1" to "5", the set value "3" may be set, while when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "6", the set value may be set. There is no possibility that the set value "3" is set. Further, when the set value is "3", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "3" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "3", it is highly possible that the set value "3" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the set value is "2", the number of short vibrations and vibration voices may be determined to be "1" to "4", while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "5". It is not determined to be "6". Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1" to "4", the set value "2" may be set, while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "5" to "6". In the case of "", there is no possibility that the set value "2" is set. Further, when the set value is "2", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "2" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "2", it is highly possible that the set value "2" is set.

Further, according to the vibration frequency determination table, when the set value is "1", the number of short vibrations and vibration voices may be determined to be "1" to "3", while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "4". It is not determined to be "6". Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "1" to "3", the set value "1" may be set, while the number of short vibrations and vibration voices is "4" to "6". In the case of "", there is no possibility that the set value "1" is set. Further, when the set value is "1", the probability that the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1" is the highest. Therefore, when the number of short vibrations and vibration sounds is "1", it is highly possible that the set value "1" is set.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines the number of vibrations, the first hybrid effect composed of short vibrations and vibration sounds of the number of times according to the determination result is started from the start of the special figure fluctuation effect to be started from now on. Let me.

Further, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the hybrid effect is not executed in the hybrid effect execution determination, it determines whether or not to execute the advance notice effect suggesting that the jackpot game may be executed. The advance notice effect execution judgment is made. The notice effect is composed of short vibrations related to the hybrid effect. In addition, there are three types of short vibrations related to the advance notice effect of 2, 4, and 6, and as the number of short vibrations increases, the possibility that the jackpot game will be executed increases.

The advance notice effect execution determination is executed with reference to the advance notice effect execution determination table. The notice effect execution determination table is associated with the special figure change pattern indicated by the special figure change start command. As shown in FIG. 59 (A), as the advance notice effect execution determination table, the advance notice effect execution determination table associated with the SP jackpot variation, the advance notice effect execution determination table associated with the L jackpot variation, and the SP loss variation. The notice effect execution determination table associated with, the advance notice effect execution determination table associated with the L loss variation, the advance notice effect execution determination table associated with the N loss variation, and the normal loss variation. A notice effect execution determination table is provided. Each advance notice effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the advance notice effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 59 (A).

According to the advance notice effect execution determination table, it may be determined that "the advance notice effect is executed" in both the case of the jackpot fluctuation and the case of the loss change. That is, when the advance notice effect is executed, it may be a big hit or a loss. Therefore, in the advance notice effect, there is a possibility that the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3, which indicate a big hit in the special figure change effect corresponding to the special figure change start command, are stopped and displayed in the big hit game state. It is a production that suggests that. Further, in the case of the reach fluctuation and the non-reach fluctuation (normal loss fluctuation), it may be determined that "the advance notice effect is executed". That is, when the advance notice effect is executed, it may or may not develop into reach. Therefore, the advance notice effect is an effect that suggests that the special figure change effect corresponding to the special figure variable display related to the special figure change start command may develop into reach.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the advance notice effect is to be executed in the advance notice effect execution determination table, the effect control microcomputer 121 subsequently determines the number of times of the advance notice effect vibration for determining the number of short vibrations related to the advance notice effect. The advance notice effect vibration frequency determination is executed with reference to the advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table. The advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table is associated with the special figure fluctuation pattern indicated by the special figure fluctuation start command. As shown in FIG. 59B, as the advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table, the advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with the SP jackpot fluctuation, the advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with the L jackpot fluctuation, and the advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table. The advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with the SP loss fluctuation, the advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with the L loss variation, the advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with the N loss variation, and the normal loss. A notice effect vibration frequency determination table associated with fluctuations is provided. In each advance notice effect vibration frequency determination table, the selection rate for the number of short vibrations (2 times, 4 times, 6 times) related to each advance notice effect is appropriately set to the predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 59 (B). It is set.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines the number of times of the advance notice effect vibration, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts the advance notice effect composed of the number of short vibrations according to the determination result from the start of the special figure variation effect to be started from now on.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment, the jackpot game is executed by executing the hybrid effect by the number of times of the interlocking vibration (long vibration, short vibration) and sound (vibration voice). Since it is suggested that there is a possibility of being played and information about the set value is suggested, it is possible to effectively improve the game entertainment. Further, regarding the hybrid effect, when the number of vibrations and the number of sounds match, it is suggested that there is a high possibility that the set value corresponds to the number of vibrations, while the number of vibrations and the number of sounds are different. If they do not match, it is suggested that the set value corresponds to the number of vibrations, so that the vibration sound in the hybrid effect can be further focused on. Furthermore, when the short vibration and the vibration sound are linked, the information about the set value is suggested by the number of times as the hybrid effect, while when it is composed only of the short vibration, the jackpot game is executed by the number of times as the advance notice effect. Since it is suggested that there is a possibility that the game will be played, it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

(Example of modification of the second embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY2 according to the second embodiment will be described. The specific mode and time of the vibration related to the hybrid effect in which the vibration and the sound are interlocked, and the specific mode and time of the sound are not limited to the second embodiment and can be appropriately changed. Further, the execution timing of the hybrid effect is not limited to the time when the special figure hold occurs or the special figure variable display starts, as in the second embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. Further, the relationship between the number of vibrations and sounds related to the hybrid effect and the content of the information regarding the set value suggested by the number of times is not limited to the second embodiment, and may be appropriately changed.

Further, in the second embodiment, the first effect button 40k is configured to be vibrable, and the hybrid effect is executed by the vibration of the first effect button 40k, but the vibrating target is not limited to the first effect button 40k and is appropriate. You may change it to. For example, the second effect button 41k may be configured to be vibrable, and the vibration of the second effect button 41k may be linked with the sound to execute the hybrid effect. Alternatively, a movable body that is not operable, such as the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k, may be configured to be vibrable, and the vibration and sound of the movable body may be linked to perform a hybrid effect.

Further, the long vibration sound related to the look-ahead hybrid is a sound representing long vibration, and the short vibration sound related to the hybrid is a sound representing short vibration, but the long vibration voice and the short vibration voice are associated with each other. For example, they may be composed of the same type of notification sound (pipipi), and may simply be a sound corresponding to the time of long vibration or short vibration, instead of the sound representing the vibration.

Further, in the second hybrid effect, the number of vibrations is one more than the number of vibration sounds, and the number of vibrations suggests a set value, but the number of vibration sounds is larger than the number of vibrations. It may be configured so that the number of vibration voices suggests a set value once more.

Further, for example, it is composed of a hybrid effect (first hybrid effect) composed of a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) of long vibration and long vibration sound, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times) of short vibration and short vibration sound. The hybrid effect to be performed (second hybrid effect) is feasible, and the jackpot expectation is higher when the first hybrid effect is executed than when the second hybrid effect is executed. Alternatively, the jackpot expectation may be higher when the second hybrid effect is executed than when the first hybrid effect is executed. Further, when the first hybrid effect is executed, for example, a set value advantageous to the player such as a set value "5" or a set value "6" is set as compared with the case where the second hybrid effect is executed. For example, the setting value "5" or the setting value "6" is higher when the second hybrid effect is executed than when the first hybrid effect is executed. It may be configured so that there is a high possibility that a setting value advantageous to the player such as is set. These shall be applicable to both or one of the hybrid effect and the look-ahead hybrid effect.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment of the present invention. In the following, mainly, as the third embodiment, the points different from the basic embodiment will be described. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

In the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment, when the prepaid card is taken out from the card unit CU in which the prepaid card is inserted, an effect suggesting information about the set value (set value suggestion effect) is executed. There is.

FIG. 60 is a perspective view integrally showing the pachinko gaming machine PY3 and the card unit CU according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 60, the card unit CU is adjacent to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine PY3. A prepaid card insertion hole CUh for inserting a prepaid card is formed in the lower portion of the card unit CU.

Further, the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment includes a return button 43k in addition to the first effect button 40k and the second effect button 41k as an operation means that can be operated by the player. FIG. 61 is a plan view of the upper plate 34 of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 61, the return button 43k is arranged on the right side of the supply ball storage hole 34A on the upper surface of the upper plate 34, and is configured to be pressable like the first effect button 40k. When the return button 43k is operated, the prepaid card comes out (returned) from the prepaid card insertion hole CUh.

The return button 43k is connected to the return button sensor 43a. FIG. 62 is a block diagram of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment on the game control board side. As shown in FIG. 62, the return button sensor 43a is connected to the game control board 100. When the return button sensor 43a detects an operation on the return button 43k, the return button sensor 43a outputs a signal (return button detection signal) indicating that the operation on the return button 43k has been performed as the detection content to the game control board 100. Although detailed description is omitted, when the game control microcomputer 101 detects the return button detection signal, it transmits a command (return button operation command) indicating that the return button 43k has been operated to the payout control board 170. .. When the payout control board 170 receives the return button operation command from the game control microcomputer 101, the payout control board 170 presents the prepaid card.

Further, in the third embodiment, in the ending effect corresponding to the ending of the jackpot game related to the jackpot winning in the so-called "first hit", the prepaid forgetting prevention effect for calling attention to the forgetting to remove the prepaid card is performed. Will be executed. The prepaid forgetting prevention effect is performed by the image displayed on the display unit 50a and the sound output from the speaker 52. In the following, the image related to the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is referred to as "prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect image", and the sound related to the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is referred to as "prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect sound".

The effect mode of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect includes a normal (default) mode that does not suggest information about the set value and a special mode that suggests information about the set value. In the third embodiment, as the information regarding the set value, a set value that is relatively high and advantageous to the player, specifically, the set value "5" is set, and the set value "6" is set. Is set. In the following, the special aspect of the prepaid forgetting prevention effect may be referred to as a “set value suggestion effect”. Further, the special mode suggesting that the set value "5" is set is the "first special mode", and the special mode suggesting that the set value "6" is set is the "second special mode". The first special aspect of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is referred to as the "first set value suggestion effect", and the second special aspect of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is referred to as the "second set value suggestion effect". Sometimes referred to.

Here, the contents of the prepaid forgetting prevention effect will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing how the prepaid forgetting prevention effect is being executed. Specifically, FIG. 63 (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect of the normal mode is executed, and FIG. 63 (B) is a prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect of the first special aspect (first setting). FIG. 63 (C) is a diagram showing how the value suggestion effect) is being executed, and FIG. 63 (C) is a diagram showing how the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect (second set value suggestion effect) of the second special aspect is being executed. ..

As shown in FIGS. 63 (A) to 63 (C), the normal mode of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, the first special mode of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, and the second special mode of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect. , The same prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect image (prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect image G50) is displayed on the display unit 50a. The display content of the prepaid forgetting prevention effect image G50 can be appropriately set within a range that can alert the forgetting to remove the prepaid card, but in the third embodiment, the warning is given to the forgetting to remove the prepaid card. The text "Please be careful not to forget or steal the prepaid card." And the illustration of the prepaid card coming out of the prepaid card insertion hole CUh is included in the prepaid forgetting prevention effect image G50.

In addition, the speaker 52 emits different prepaid forget-to-take prevention effects from the speaker 52 in the normal mode of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, the first special aspect of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, and the second special aspect of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect. It is output. Specifically, the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect voice related to the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect in the normal mode is composed of a voice of a male voice saying "Please be careful", and is related to the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect in the first special mode. The prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect voice is composed of the voice of a woman saying "Please be careful about forgetting to take or theft", and the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect voice related to the second special aspect of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is " Please be careful not to forget or steal your prepaid card. "

In this way, the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect may be executed, but in the third embodiment, when the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the ending effect, the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is based on the set value. Is determined in a normal mode or a special mode. Whether the execution is performed in the normal mode or the special mode is determined by the special mode execution determination.

The special aspect execution determination is executed with reference to the special aspect execution determination table. The special mode execution determination table is associated with the set value. The special mode execution determination table is associated with the set value. That is, as the special aspect execution determination table, the special aspect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6", the special aspect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5", and the setting values "1" to the setting. A special mode execution determination associated with the value “4” is provided.

FIG. 64 shows a configuration example of the special mode execution determination table. Each special mode execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the prepaid forgetting prevention effect in the special mode is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG.

According to the special mode execution determination table, the selection rate for "execution of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect in the special mode" is higher in the case of the set value "6" than in the case of the set value "5". That is, in the case of the set value "6", the special mode of preventing forgetting to take the prepaid card is more likely to be executed than in the case of the set value "5". Further, in the case of the set value "1" to the set value "4", "execute the prepaid forgetting prevention effect in a special mode" is not selected. This is because in the third embodiment, when the set value is "5" or the set value is "6", it is suggested that the set value is set.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4317 that the ending command related to the ending of the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning in the so-called "first hit" is received, the effect mode setting process of step S4318 is followed. In addition, the process related to the special mode execution determination is performed. The effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value in the process related to the special mode execution determination, and performs the special mode execution determination based on the special mode execution determination table associated with the confirmed set value.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is executed in the special mode", the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect to be executed in the special mode at a predetermined timing in the ending effect. If the setting value "5" is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs a female voice "Please be careful not to forget or steal" from the speaker 52, and the setting value "6" is set. If so, the female voice "Please be careful not to forget or steal the prepaid card" is output from the speaker 52. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is not executed in the special mode", the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is executed in the normal mode at a predetermined timing in the ending effect. .. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs a male voice "Please be careful" from the speaker 52.

Even when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that "the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is executed in a special mode" in the special mode execution determination, "the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is not executed in the special mode" in the special mode execution determination. Also in the case of determining, the ending effect start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 in the above-mentioned ending effect start process. Here, when the ending effect of the jackpot game based on the jackpot winning in the so-called "first hit" is executed, the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect image G50 is displayed at a predetermined timing of the ending effect. The indicated ending effect start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The ending effect start command set in the output buffer is output to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S4004. Then, when the image control board 140 receives the ending effect start command, the display unit 50a performs the ending effect of the effect content indicated by the ending effect start command.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment, when the jackpot game in which the high-base gaming state is subsequently completed, a special mode of prepaid forget-taking prevention effect is executed. Information on the set value, in detail, it may be suggested that the set value "5", which is a relatively high set value, is set, and that the set value "6" is set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the prepaid forgetting prevention effect that calls attention to the prevention of forgetting to take the prepaid card, which is not generally paid much attention.

(Example of modification of the third embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY3 according to the third embodiment will be described. The specific effect content related to the set value suggestion effect is not limited to the third embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, in the third embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is executed in the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect. It may be configured to be feasible with images and sounds, and a set value suggestion effect may be performed in the effect. Further, although the audio content of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect voice represents a warning for forgetting to remove the prepaid card, the audio content may be changed to a voice content not related to the warning such as forgetting to remove the prepaid card. Further, in the third embodiment, the type of voice related to the set value suggestion effect is the same for the female voice in the case where the set value "5" is set and the case where the set value "6" is set. Yes, the content of the voice is different, but the type of voice related to the setting value suggestion effect is different, and the content of the voice is configured to be the same so that the setting value "5" and the setting value "6" can be distinguished. May be.

Further, in the third embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is performed by the sound output from the speaker 52, but the effect device for performing the set value suggestion effect is not particularly limited and may be appropriately changed. For example, the set value suggestion effect may be performed using another effect device such as an image displayed on the image display device 50, an operation by the board movable body 55k, or light emission by the frame lamp 53. Alternatively, the set value suggestion effect may be executed depending on the display mode or display position of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect image G50. For example, the color of the normal aspect, the color of the first special aspect, and the color of the second special aspect may be different from each other. Alternatively, the size of the normal aspect, the size of the first special aspect, and the size of the second special aspect may be different from each other.

Further, in the third embodiment, regarding the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, the normal mode and the special mode are distinguished by the effect content of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect sound, but whether or not the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect sound is executed. The normal aspect and the special aspect may be distinguished from each other. For example, when the normal mode of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is executed, the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect image is only displayed on the display unit 50a, and in the special mode of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, the same prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is displayed. The prevention effect image may be displayed on the display unit 50a, and the prepaid forgetting prevention effect sound may be output from the speaker 52. Further, when the prepaid forgetting prevention effect of the normal mode is executed, only the prepaid forgetting prevention effect sound is output from the speaker 52, and in the special mode of the prepaid forgetting prevention effect, the same prepaid forgetting prevention effect is prevented. The effect sound may be output from the speaker 52, and the effect image for preventing forgetting to take the prepaid card may be displayed on the display unit 50a.

Further, in the third embodiment, as the information regarding the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect, the set value "5" having a relatively high set value is set and the set value "6" is set. However, this information is not limited to the third embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect, only one of the setting value "5" and the setting value "6" having a relatively high setting value is set. May be set to. In addition to or in place of the setting value "5" being set and the setting value "6" being set, all or part of the other setting values are set. It may be set as information about the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect. Furthermore, it is not a specific setting value, but the setting value is odd, the setting value is even, the setting value is relatively high, and the setting value is relatively low. Any of them may be used as information on the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect.

Further, in the third embodiment, when the jackpot game ends, the information regarding the set value is suggested by using the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, but the set value is related by using an effect other than the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect. Information may be suggested. For example, in the ending of a jackpot game, immediately after or immediately before the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, an effect related to the company that manufactures the pachinko game machine PY3 (for example, display of CI (corporate identity)) should be enabled. , Information on the set value may be suggested using the effect. In this case, for example, when the CI is displayed, a voice representing the company or a voice not representing the company is output, but the type and pitch of the voice are the case of the normal mode and the case of the first special mode. In the case of the second special aspect, they may be different from each other. Further, the display content and display position of the CI display may be different from each other in the case of the normal mode, the case of the first special mode, and the case of the second special mode.

Further, although it is possible to execute the effect (display of CI) related to the company that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine PY3, the set value suggestion effect is not executed in the effect related to the company that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine PY3. That is, with respect to the effect relating to the company that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine PY3, the normal mode (normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information regarding the set value) relating to the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect in the third embodiment. It is possible that only such an embodiment is provided. Furthermore, the effect (CI display) related to the company that manufactures the pachinko gaming machine PY3 may be executed only at the so-called "first hit" ending, as in the case of the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect. Unlike the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, the ending of the big hit game other than the so-called "first hit" ending may be configured to be feasible. That is, in the jackpot game when the jackpot is determined in the high-probability high-base gaming state or the low-probability high-base gaming state, the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is not executed, but the pachinko gaming machine PY3 is manufactured. The production related to the company (display of CI) may be executed.

Further, in the ending related to the so-called "first hit", an effect of promoting the prevention of the so-called "entanglement" (the effect of preventing the entanglement) may be executed immediately before or immediately after the effect of preventing forgetting to take the prepaid card. In this case, in the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, the set value suggestion effect may be executed as in the third embodiment, but in the immersive prevention effect, the set value suggestion effect is not executed. 3. Only the normal mode (normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value) related to the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect in the embodiment may be provided. On the contrary, in the immersive prevention effect, the set value suggestion effect can be executed as in the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect according to the third embodiment, but in the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, the set value suggestion effect is not executed. good. Further, the immersive prevention effect may be executed only by the so-called "first hit" ending, as in the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, but unlike the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect, the so-called "first hit" ending. It may be configured to be feasible even at the ending of a jackpot game other than the above. That is, in the jackpot game when the jackpot is determined in the high-probability high-base game state or the low-probability high-base game state, the prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect is not executed, but the immersive prevention effect is executed. Is also good.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a fourth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the following, mainly, the fourth embodiment will be described as different from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

The pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment is the number of times of variable display of special figures executed without winning the jackpot after the power is turned on or after the jackpot game is executed, that is, the so-called "number of addictions". To count. Then, when the number of addictions is a predetermined number of times, a predetermined sound effect may be output from the speaker 52 based on the set value. This sound effect is common to any number of addictions and any set value, and suggests information on the set value according to the number of addictions. Here, the relationship between the number of addictions when the sound effect is output and the information regarding the set value suggesting that the sound effect is output by the number of addictions will be described.

When the number of addictions is 3 digits or less and the last 2 digits are "66", specifically, the number of addictions is 66 times, 166 times, 266 times, 366 times, 466 times, 566 times, 666 times. When the sound effect is output when the number of times is 766 times, 866 times, or 966 times, the output of the sound effect suggests that the set value "6" is set. In other words, when the set value "6" is set, the number of addictions is 3 digits or less, and the last 2 digits are 66 times, 166 times consisting of the number of consecutive "6" of the set value "6". The sound effect may be output when the number of times is 266 times, 366 times, 466 times, 566 times, 666 times, 766 times, 866 times, or 966 times.

Further, when the number of addictions is 3 digits or less and the last 2 digits are "55", specifically, the number of addictions is 55 times, 155 times, 255 times, 355 times, 455 times, 555 times. , 655 times, 755 times, 855 times, or 955 times, when the sound effect is output, the output of the sound effect suggests that the set value "5" is set. In other words, when the set value "5" is set, the number of addictions is 3 digits or less, and the last 2 digits are 55 times, 155 times consisting of the number of consecutive "5" of the set value "5". The sound effect may be output at times of 255 times, 355 times, 455 times, 555 times, 655 times, 755 times, 855 times, or 955 times.

Further, when the number of addictions is 3 digits or less and the last 2 digits are "44", specifically, the number of addictions is 44 times, 144 times, 244 times, 344 times, 444 times, 544 times. , 644 times, 744 times, 844 times, or 944 times, when the sound effect is output, the output of the sound effect suggests that the set value "4" is set. In other words, when the set value "4" is set, the number of addictions is 3 digits or less, and the last 2 digits are 44 times, 144 times, which is the number of times that "4" of the set value "4" is continuous. The sound effect may be output when the number of times is 244 times, 344 times, 444 times, 544 times, 644 times, 744 times, 844 times, or 944 times.

Further, when the number of addictions is 3 digits or less and the last 2 digits are "33", specifically, the number of addictions is 33 times, 133 times, 233 times, 333 times, 433 times, 533 times. , 633 times, 733 times, 833 times, or 933 times, when the sound effect is output, the output of the sound effect suggests that the set value "3" is set. In other words, when the set value "3" is set, the number of addictions is 3 digits or less, and the last 2 digits are 33 times, 133 times consisting of the number of consecutive "3" of the set value "3". The sound effect may be output when the number of times is 233 times, 333 times, 433 times, 533 times, 633 times, 733 times, 833 times, or 933 times.

Further, when the number of addictions is 3 digits or less and the last 2 digits are "22", specifically, the number of addictions is 22 times, 122 times, 222 times, 322 times, 422 times, 522 times. , 622 times, 722 times, 822 times, or 922 times, when the sound effect is output, the output of the sound effect suggests that the set value "2" is set. In other words, when the set value "2" is set, the number of addictions is 3 digits or less, and the last 2 digits are 22 times, 122 times in which "2" of the set value "2" is continuous. The sound effect may be output at times 222 times, 322 times, 422 times, 522 times, 622 times, 722 times, 822 times, or 922 times.

Further, when the number of addictions is 3 digits or less and the last 2 digits are "11", specifically, the number of addictions is 11, 111, 211, 311 411, 511. , 611 times, 711 times, 811 times, or 911 times, when the sound effect is output, the output of the sound effect suggests that the set value "1" is set. In other words, when the set value "1" is set, the number of addictions is 3 digits or less, and the last 2 digits are 11 times, 111 times in which "1" of the set value "1" is continuous. The sound effect may be output when the number of times is 211 times, 311 times, 411 times, 511 times, 611 times, 711 times, 811 times, or 911 times.

If a sound effect is output when the number of addictions is "123", the output of the sound effect is the setting value "1", the setting value "2", or the setting that constitutes the number related to this number of times. It suggests that any of the values "3" is set. In other words, when any of the relatively low setting values "1", the setting value "2", or the setting value "3" is set, these setting values "1" and "2" are set. , And "3", the sound effect may be output when it is "123" times. Further, if a sound effect is output when the number of addictions is "456", the output of the sound effect is the setting value "4", the setting value "5", or the setting that constitutes the number related to this number of times. It is suggested that any of the values "6" is set. In other words, when any of the relatively high setting values "4", the setting value "5", or the setting value "6" is set, these setting values "4" and "5" are set. , And "5", the sound effect may be output when it is "456" times.

If a sound effect is output when the number of addictions is "135", the output of the sound effect is the setting value "1", the setting value "3", or the setting that constitutes an odd number related to this number of times. It suggests that any of the values "5" is set. In other words, if any of the set value "1", the set value "3", or the set value "5" is set, these odd set values "1", "3", and "5" are set. A sound effect may be output when the number of times is "135". Further, if a sound effect is output when the number of addictions is "246", the output of the sound effect is the setting value "2", the setting value "4", or the setting that constitutes an even number related to this number of times. It suggests that any of the values "6" is set. In other words, if any of the set value "2", the set value "4", or the set value "6" is set, these even set values "2", "4", and "6" are set. A sound effect may be output when the number of times is "246" times.

When the pachinko gaming machine PY4 determines that the special figure variation start command has been received in step S4305, the pachinko gaming machine PY4 determines the predetermined number of addiction RAMs 124 in order to count the number of addictions after completing the special figure variation effect start process in step S4306. The counter value of the addiction counting counter provided in the area is added by "1". On the other hand, when the pachinko gaming machine PY4 determines that the special figure variation start command has been received in step S4305, the pachinko gaming machine PY4 determines the predetermined number of times of addiction in order to count the number of addictions after finishing the special figure variation effect start process in step S4306. The counter value of the addiction counting counter provided in the area is added by "1". When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the opening command has been received in step S4313, the effect control microcomputer 121 clears the counter value of the addiction counting counter after completing the opening effect start process of step S4314. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 121 adds "1" to the counter value of the addiction counting counter at the start of the special figure fluctuation display, and clears the counter value of the addiction counting counter at the start of the jackpot game, thereby increasing the number of addictions. Can be counted, and the number of addictions can be specified by checking the addiction counting counter.

In this way, a sound effect suggesting information about the set value is output according to the combination of the set value and the number of addictions. Hereinafter, the output of this sound effect will be referred to as a “set value suggestion effect”. In the fourth embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether or not to execute the set value suggestion effect based on the set value and the number of addictions. Whether or not to execute the set value suggestion effect is determined by the set value suggestion effect execution determination.

The set value suggestion effect execution determination is executed with reference to the set value suggestion effect execution determination table. The set value suggestion effect execution determination table is associated with the set value and the number of addictions. The set value suggestion effect execution determination table is first associated with the set value. That is, as the set value suggestion effect execution determination table, the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value "6", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value "5", and the setting. The setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the value "4", the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the setting value "3", and the setting value suggestion associated with the setting value "2". An effect execution determination table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value "1" are provided.

FIG. 65 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the setting value “6”, and FIG. 65 (B) shows the setting value suggestion associated with the setting value “5”. FIG. 66 (A) shows a configuration example of the effect execution determination table, FIG. 66 (A) shows a configuration example of the setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the setting value “4”, and FIG. 66 (B) shows the setting value “ A configuration example of the setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with "3" is shown, and FIG. 67A shows a configuration example of the setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "2". FIG. 67B shows a configuration example of the setting value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the setting value “1”.

Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value “6” is further subjected to the set value suggestion effect execution determination associated with the number of addictions “66 times”. The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "166 times", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "246 times", and the number of addictions "266 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "366 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "456 times". The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "466 times", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "566 times", and the number of addictions "666 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "766 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "866 times". There is a table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "966 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value “5” is further subjected to the set value suggestion effect execution determination associated with the number of addictions “55 times”. The table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "135 times", the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "155 times", and the number of addictions "255 times" The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "355 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "455 times". The table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "456 times", the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "555 times", and the number of addictions "655 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "755 times", and the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "855 times". There is a table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "955 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value “4” is further subjected to the set value suggestion effect execution determination associated with the number of addictions “44 times”. The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "144 times", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "244 times", and the number of addictions "246 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "344 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "444 times". The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "456 times", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "544 times", and the number of addictions "644 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "744 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "844 times". There is a table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "944 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (B), the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value “3” is further subjected to the set value suggestion effect execution determination associated with the number of addictions “33 times”. The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "123 times", the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "133 times", and the number of addictions "135 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "233 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "355 times". The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "433 times", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "533 times", and the number of addictions "633 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "733 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "833 times". There is a table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "933 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value “2” is further subjected to the set value suggestion effect execution determination associated with the number of addictions “22 times”. The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "122 times", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "123 times", and the number of addictions "222 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "246 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "322 times". The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "422 times", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "522 times", and the number of addictions "622 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "722 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "822 times". There is a table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "922 times".

Further, as shown in FIG. 67 (B), the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the set value “1” is further subjected to the set value suggestion effect execution determination associated with the number of addictions “11 times”. The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "111 times", the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "123 times", and the number of addictions "135 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "211 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution determination associated with the number of addictions "311 times". The table, the set value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "411 times", the set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "511 times", and the number of addictions "611 times". The associated setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table associated with the number of addictions "711 times", and the set value suggestion effect execution judgment associated with the number of addictions "811 times". There is a table and a set value suggestion effect execution determination table associated with the number of addictions "911 times".

In each set value suggestion effect execution determination table shown in FIGS. 65 to 67, the selection rate for executing / not executing the set value suggestion effect is appropriately set to a predetermined selection rate shown in FIGS. 65 to 67. It is set.

According to the setting value suggestion effect execution judgment table, the number of addictions when suggesting each setting value (the number of addictions in which the number related to each setting value is the last two consecutive digits) increases as the number of addictions increases. The selection rate for "execute the set value suggestion effect" becomes high. Further, for the set value "1", the set value "2", and the set value "3", the selection rate for "execute the set value suggestion effect" related to the number of addictions "123 times" is set to be the same. Similarly, for the set value "4", the set value "5", and the set value "6", the selection rate for "execute the set value suggestion effect" related to the number of addictions "456 times" is also set to be the same. .. Further, for the set value "1", the set value "3", and the set value "5", the selection rate for "execute the set value suggestion effect" related to the number of addictions "135 times" is set to be the same. Similarly, for the set value "2", the set value "4", and the set value "6", the selection rate for "execute the set value suggestion effect" related to the number of addictions "246 times" is also set to be the same. ..

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation stop command has been received in step S4307, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the process related to the set value suggestion effect determination after the special figure variation effect end process in step S4308. The effect control microcomputer 121 first confirms the set value in the process related to the set value suggestion effect determination. Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 121 confirms the number of addictions and can execute the set value suggestion effect with the confirmed set value, that is, the set value suggestion effect associated with the confirmed set value. It is judged whether or not it is the number of addictions associated with the execution judgment table. Here, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the number of addictions is such that the set value suggestion effect can be executed with the confirmed set value, the set value suggestion effect execution associated with the confirmed set value and the number of addictions is executed. The setting value suggestion effect execution judgment is performed based on the judgment table.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that "the set value suggestion effect is executed" in the set value suggestion effect execution determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the set value suggestion effect to be executed. That is, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs a sound effect suggesting information about the set value from the speaker 52 when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed.

Next, a specific example of the set value suggestion effect will be described. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing how the set value suggestion effect is performed. Specifically, FIG. 68 (A) is a diagram showing how the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are displayed in the special figure variation effect, and FIG. 68 (B) is at the end of the special figure variation effect. A diagram showing a state in which the temporary stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in a mode showing a loss, FIG. 68 (C) is immediately after FIG. 68 (B) and is a mode showing the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ1 to. The figure showing the state in which the stop display of EZ3 is performed and the set value suggestion effect is executed, FIG. 68 (D) shows the state in which the special figure variation effect is started immediately after the set value suggestion effect is executed. It is a figure which shows. It is assumed that the special figure fluctuation pattern related to the special figure variable display in which the set value suggestion effect is executed is a loss variation without reach.

As shown in FIG. 68 (A), the display unit 50a performs a variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 as a special figure variation effect, and when the special figure variation effect is about to end, it is shown in FIG. 68 (B). As described above, the temporary stop display of the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is performed in an manner indicating a loss. Then, when the special figure fluctuation stop command is transmitted to the effect control board 120 at the start of the special figure stop display, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that "the set value suggestion effect is executed" in the set value suggestion effect execution determination. Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the staging symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed in a manner indicating a loss, and a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52 to execute the set value suggestion staging. If it is not determined in the setting value suggestion effect execution determination that "the set value suggestion effect is executed", the speaker 52 does not output a predetermined sound effect, and the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 show a loss. A stop display is displayed. Then, in response to the start of the next variable display of the special figure, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), the next variable display of the special figure is started, and the variable display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 is also started. ..

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment, a set value suggestion effect in which a predetermined sound effect is output from the speaker 52 at a specific number of addictions is executed, and the content differs depending on the number of addictions. Since it suggests information about the set value, even if it is difficult to win a big hit, it is possible to prevent tiredness of the game and improve the game interest by paying attention to the number of addictions. Furthermore, when suggesting each set value, the possibility that the set value suggestion effect is executed increases as the number of addictions increases, so that it is easy to reduce the discomfort of the player and suppress the decrease in the operating rate. can. In addition, as information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect, the setting value itself, the setting value is odd, the setting value is even, the setting value is relatively high, and the setting value is relatively low. Since the set value is provided, the variation of the set value suggestion effect increases, and it is possible to prevent getting bored with the set value suggestion effect.

(Example of modification of the fourth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY4 according to the fourth embodiment will be described. In the fourth embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is performed by the sound output from the speaker 52, but the effect device that performs the set value suggestion effect is not particularly limited and may be appropriately changed. For example, the set value suggestion effect may be performed using another effect device such as an image displayed on the image display device 50, an operation by the board movable body 55k, or light emission by the frame lamp 53.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY4, as the category of information regarding the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect, the set value itself, the set value is odd, the set value is even, and the set value is relatively high. It is provided that there is a relatively low setting value, and the category of information about these setting values is suggested using a common sound effect, but the setting value itself, the setting value is an odd number. It may be suggested by using different sound effects that the setting value is an even number, the setting value is relatively high, and the setting value is relatively low. That is, the set value itself (set value "1" to set value "6") is suggested by using the sound effect A, and the set value is odd (set value "1", set value "3", set value "5". ) Is suggested by using the sound effect B, and the setting value is even (setting value "2", setting value "4", setting value "6") is suggested by using the sound effect C. A relatively high setting value (setting value "4", setting value "5", setting value "6") is suggested by using sound effect D, and a relatively low setting value (setting value "1"). , The set value "3", the set value "5") can be suggested by using the sound effect E.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY4, the set value suggestion effect is performed when the special figure stop display (when the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3 are stopped and displayed), but the execution timing of the set value suggestion effect is not limited to this. It may be appropriately changed as long as it is within the special figure variable display (within the special figure variation effect) such as at the start of the special figure variation display (at the start of the variation display of the effect symbols EZ1 to EZ3).

Further, the number of addictions that the set value suggestion effect may be executed is not limited to the fourth embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. For example, when suggesting the set value itself (set value "1" to set value "6"), if the set value is "1" and the number of addictions is "11 times" and "111 times", the set value " If it is "2", when the number of addictions is "22 times" and "222 times", if the set value is "3", if the number of addictions is "33 times" and "333 times", the set value is "4". If the number of addictions is "44 times" and "444 times", if the set value is "5", the number of addictions is "55 times" and "555 times", and if the set value is "6", the number of addictions is When all the numbers related to the number of addictions are composed of the set values, such as "66 times" and "666 times", the set value itself (set value "1" to set value "6") is suggested. May be. Further, when suggesting that the set value is an odd number, the number of addictions is not limited to "135 times", and at least a number related to the number of addictions such as "315 times" or "531 times" is set. It may be sufficient to include all odd numbers of values. Further, when it is suggested that the set value is an even number, the number of addictions is not limited to "246 times", and the number of addictions such as "426 times" and "642 times" is not limited to the case where the number of addictions is "246 times". At least all even numbers of the set values may be included. Further, when suggesting that the set value is relatively high, the number related to the number of addictions is not limited to the case where the number of addictions is "456 times", and the number of addictions is "564 times" or "645 times". At least all of the relatively high settings may be included. Further, when suggesting that the set value is relatively low, the number of addictions is not limited to "123 times", and the number of addictions is related to the number of addictions such as "231 times" and "312 times". It may be sufficient to include all of the settings whose numbers are at least relatively low.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY4, as the category of information regarding the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect, the set value itself, the set value is odd, the set value is even, and the set value is relatively high. Although it is provided that the setting value is relatively low, the category of the information regarding the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect is not limited to these, and may be appropriately changed. For example, it may be any one of these categories, or any of these categories. Further, for example, as a category of information regarding the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect, at least the setting value "1" that is not the most disadvantageous to the player or the setting value "5" or the setting value "5" that is highly advantageous to the player is used. A category other than the category according to the fourth embodiment, such as "6", may be provided in place of the category according to the fourth embodiment, or in addition to all or part of the category according to the fourth embodiment. In addition, there is a setting value itself as a category of information about the setting value, and all the setting values from the setting value "1" to the setting value "6" are provided as the setting value itself, but the setting value "6" or the setting value is provided. It may be a part of the set value such as only the value "1".

In addition, as the number of addictions, the number of variable display of special figures that is executed without winning the big hit after the big hit game is set, but the number of variable display of special figures that is executed without winning the big hit in the normal game state is set. You may set it. That is, when a game state advantageous to the player such as a high-probability high-base game state or a low-probability high-base game state is set after the jackpot game, the end condition related to the game state advantageous to the player is usually terminated. You may set the number of times that the special figure variable display is executed without winning the big hit after falling into the game state.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a fifth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the following, mainly, the fifth embodiment will be described as different from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

The pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment is a game that basically performs a left-handed game such as a normal game state from a game state in which a high-probability high-base game state and a low-probability high-base game state are basically right-handed. When shifting to the state, a right-handed to left-handed switch is performed, in other words, a left-handed effect (left-handed effect) is performed to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the first starting port 11.

Here, the left-handed effect will be described. The left-handed effect is performed by the image displayed on the display unit 50a and the sound output from the speaker 52. The left-handed staging is executed according to the transition from the game state in which the game is basically right-handed, such as the high-probability high-base game state and the low-probability high-base game state, to the normal game state and the normal staging mode is set. To. In the following, the image related to the left-handed effect is referred to as a "left-handed effect image", and the sound related to the left-handed effect is referred to as a "left-handed effect sound".

The left-handed effect has a normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value and a special mode that suggests information about the set value. In the fifth embodiment, as the information regarding the set value, it is set that the set value that is relatively high and advantageous to the player, specifically, the set value "5" or the set value "6" is set. There is.

The content of the left-handed effect image is the same as that of the left-handed effect in the normal mode and the left-handed effect in the special mode, but the content of the left-handed effect sound is different. That is, the left-handed effect image is composed of the same image including the left-pointing arrow and the character "left-handed" as described later in both the normal mode and the special mode, and the left-handed effect sound is "in the normal mode". It is composed of a male voice saying "Please return to left-handed", and in a special case, it is composed of a female voice saying "Please return to left-handed".

Further, in the left-handed effect of the normal mode, the left-handed effect sound is output five times. On the other hand, in the left-handed effect of the special aspect, there are cases where the left-handed effect sound is output 5 times and cases where the left-handed effect sound is output 6 times. Specifically, when the set value "5" is suggested, the left-handed effect sound is output 5 times, and when the set value "6" is suggested, the left-handed effect sound is output 6 times.

In the following, the special aspect of the left-handed effect may be referred to as a “set value suggestion effect”. Further, the special mode suggesting the set value "5" is referred to as "first special mode", and the special mode suggesting the set value "6" is referred to as "second special mode", and the left of the first special mode is referred to. The striking effect may be referred to as a "first set value suggestion effect", and the left-handed effect of the second special aspect may be referred to as a "second set value suggestion effect".

Here, a specific example of the left-handed effect will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing how the left-handed effect is being executed. In detail, FIG. 69 (A) shows a state in which the left-handed effect of the normal mode is executed, and FIG. 69 (B) shows the execution of the left-handed effect of the first special mode (first set value suggestion effect). FIG. 69 (C) is a diagram showing how the left-handed effect (second set value suggestion effect) of the second special aspect is being executed.

High-probability high-base game Since the effect is executed in the probabilistic effect mode when the game is executed in the high-probability high-base game state, and the effect is executed in the normal effect mode when the game is executed in the normal game state, the high-probability high-base game According to the transition from the state to the normal gaming state, the probability variation effect mode is changed to the normal effect mode. When the game is being executed in the low-probability high-base game state, the effect is executed in the time-saving effect mode. Move to. Then, when the mode shifts to the normal effect mode, regardless of the effect mode of the left-handed effect, as shown in FIGS. A left-handed staging image G41 including characters is displayed.

Here, if the effect mode of the left-handed effect executed is the normal mode, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the left-handed effect composed of a male voice saying "Please return to the left-handed effect". The sound is output from the speaker 52 five times. Further, if the effect mode of the executed left-handed effect is the first special mode, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the left-handed person is composed of a female voice saying "Please return to the left-handed person". The staging sound is output from the speaker 52 five times. Further, if the effect mode of the executed left-handed effect is the second special mode, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), the left-handed person is composed of a female voice saying "Please return to the left-handed person". The staging sound is output from the speaker 52 six times. In any of the left-handed effect of the normal mode, the left-handed effect of the first special mode, and the left-handed effect of the second special mode, the left-handed effect image G41 is displayed while the left-handed effect sound is output. When the display is completed and the output of the left-handed effect sound is completed, the left-handed effect image G41 is erased.

In this way, the left-handed effect may be executed, but in the fifth embodiment, when the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the left-handed effect, the left-handed effect is usually performed based on the set value. It is determined whether it is executed by or in a special mode. Whether the execution is performed in the normal mode or the special mode is determined by the special mode execution determination.

The special aspect execution determination is executed with reference to the special aspect execution determination table. The special mode execution determination table is associated with the set value. The special mode execution determination table is associated with the set value. That is, as the special aspect execution determination table, the special aspect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6", the special aspect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5", and the setting values "1" to the setting. A special mode execution determination associated with the value “4” is provided.

FIG. 70 shows a configuration example of the special mode execution determination table. Each special mode execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the left-handed effect in the special mode is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 70.

According to the special mode execution determination table, the selection rate for "execution of the left-handed effect in the special mode" is higher in the case of the set value "6" than in the case of the set value "5". That is, in the case of the set value "6", the left-handed effect of the special aspect is more likely to be executed than in the case of the set value "5". Further, in the case of the set value "1" to the set value "4", "execute the left-handed effect in a special mode" is not selected. This is because in the fifth embodiment, when the set value is "5" or the set value is "6", it is suggested that the set value is set.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the game state command has been received in step S4309, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the process related to the special mode execution determination after the game state setting process in step S4310. In the process related to the special mode execution determination, the effect control microcomputer 121 first has the game state flag “01H” or the low probability high base indicating that it is the above-mentioned high probability high base game state in the game state setting process. It is determined whether or not the game state flag "02H" indicating that the game is in the game state has been changed to the game state flag "00H" indicating the normal game state. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the game state flag has been changed to "00H", it next confirms the set value, and determines the special mode execution based on the special mode execution determination table associated with the confirmed set value. I do.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the left-handed effect is executed in the special mode", the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the left-handed effect to be executed in the special mode. If the setting value "5" is set, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the female voice "Return to left-handed" from the speaker 52 five times, and the setting value "6" is set. If so, the female voice "Return to left-handed" is output from the speaker 52 six times. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the left-handed effect is not executed in the special mode", the effect control microcomputer 121 causes the left-handed effect to be executed in the normal mode. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 121 outputs the male voice "Please return to left-handed" from the speaker 52 five times.

Further, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the left-handed effect is executed in the special mode", if the set value "5" is set, the special mode relating to the set value "5". The left-handed effect start command indicating that the left-handed effect is to be performed is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124, and if the set value "6" is set, the left-handed effect of the special mode relating to the set value "6" is set. The left-handed staging start command indicating that the staging is performed is set in the output buffer of the staging RAM 124. On the other hand, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the special mode execution determination that "the left-handed effect is not executed in the special mode", the effect control RAM 124 issues a left-handed effect start command indicating that the normal mode left-handed effect is performed. Set in the output buffer. Each left-handed effect start command set in the output buffer is output to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S4004. It should be noted that each left-handed effect start command includes information regarding the time when the left-handed effect sound is output.

When the image control board 140 receives the left-handed effect start command, the left-handed effect image G41 is displayed on the upper left of the display unit 50a, and when the time for outputting the left-handed effect sound indicated by the left-handed effect start command elapses, the image control board 140 displays the left-handed effect image G41. The left-handed staging image G41 is erased.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment, the appropriate launch method of the gaming ball is switched to a different gaming state, and the gaming ball is launched according to the switching state. Method, specifically, when a left-handed effect that encourages "left-handed" is executed, the set value is set to a relatively high setting value "5" or a set value "6" as information on the set value. It may be performed in a special manner suggesting that it is present. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the effect of promoting the method of launching the game ball, which is not generally paid much attention. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the left-handed staging is executed in a special mode, although it is a time when the high-probability high-base gaming state or the low-probability high-base gaming state that is advantageous to the player is switched to the normal gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. Then, it is suggested that the set value is relatively high and is set to the set value "5" or the set value "6" which is advantageous for the player, so that the player's motivation to play is reduced. Can be alleviated. Further, since the left-handed effect is completed in a relatively short time after shifting to the normal gaming state, it is possible to reduce the left-handed effect and prevent the left-handed effect from being reduced.

Further, although the detailed description was not given in the fifth embodiment, when the jackpot game is started, the right-handed image G2 is displayed in the jackpot game as described in the basic embodiment. .. That is, in the jackpot game, as an effect corresponding to the left-handed effect, a right-handed effect is performed to encourage the game ball to be fired toward the big winning opening 14 (right-handed effect). Further, although detailed description is omitted, even in the high-probability high-base gaming state (probability variation effect mode) and the low-probability high-base game state (time-saving effect mode) in which right-handedness is appropriate, the right-handed image G2 The same image or an image different from the right-handed image G2 but having the same or similar function is displayed, and an effect (right-handed effect) for urging the game ball to be launched toward the second starting port 12 is performed. Then, the right-handed effect is executed in this way, but the set value suggestion effect is not executed in the right-handed effect. That is, as for the right-handed staging, only the normal mode (normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value) related to the left-handed staging in the fifth embodiment is provided. However, the right-handed effect is configured to be executable with images and sounds, and in the right-handed effect, the set value suggestion effect can be executed as in the left-handed effect according to the fifth embodiment, but the left-handed effect is set. The value suggestion effect may not be executed.

(Example of modification of the fifth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY5 according to the fifth embodiment will be described. The specific effect content related to the set value suggestion effect is not limited to the fifth embodiment, and may be changed as appropriate. For example, the content of the voice related to the set value suggestion effect may be a content other than "return to left-handed". In addition, regarding the number of voices related to the set value suggestion effect, the number of times other than 5 times such as 2 times is set when the set value is "5", and the number of times other than 6 times such as 3 times is set when the set value is "6". May be.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the content of the sound related to the set value suggestion effect is the same in the case where the set value "5" is set and the case where the set value "6" is set. Although the number of times is different, the number of voices is the same, but the contents of the voices may be different. Further, both the content and the number of times of the sound related to the set value suggestion effect may be different depending on whether the set value "5" is set or the set value "6" is set.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the left-handed effect is configured so that the normal mode and the special mode can be discriminated by the content of the sound and the type of the sound, but any of the content of the sound and the type of the sound. One may be the same and the other may be different so that they can be discriminated. Furthermore, both the content of the voice and the type of the voice are made the same so that the normal mode and the special mode, and further, the normal mode, the first special mode, and the second special mode can be discriminated by the number of voices. May be. For example, regarding the content and type of the same left-handed effect sound, the number of times the sound is output is once in the normal mode, the number of times the sound is output twice in the case of the first special mode, and the sound is played in the case of the second special mode. The number of outputs may be three.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is performed by the sound output from the speaker 52, but the effect device for performing the set value suggestion effect is not particularly limited and may be appropriately changed. For example, the set value suggestion effect may be performed using another effect device such as an image displayed on the image display device 50, an operation by the board movable body 55k, or light emission by the frame lamp 53. Alternatively, the set value suggestion effect may be executed depending on the display mode or display position of the left-handed effect image G41. For example, the color of the normal aspect, the color of the first special aspect, and the color of the second special aspect may be different from each other. Alternatively, the size of the normal aspect, the size of the first special aspect, and the size of the second special aspect may be different from each other.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, regarding the left-handed effect, the normal mode and the special mode are distinguished by the effect content of the left-handed effect sound, but the normal mode and the special mode are determined depending on whether or not the left-handed effect sound is executed. May be distinguished. For example, when the left-handed effect of the normal mode is executed, the left-handed effect image is only displayed on the display unit 50a, and in the left-handed effect sound of the special aspect, the same left-handed effect image is displayed on the display unit 50a. The left-handed staging sound may be output from the speaker 52. Further, when the left-handed effect sound of the normal mode is executed, the left-handed effect sound is only output from the speaker 52, and in the left-handed effect sound of the special mode, the same left-handed effect sound is output from the speaker 52. It may be output and the left-handed effect image may be displayed on the display unit 50a.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, as the information regarding the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect, the set value "5" having a relatively high set value is set and the set value "6" is set. However, this information is not limited to the fifth embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as information about the setting value suggested by the setting value suggestion effect, only one of the setting value "5" and the setting value "6" having a relatively high setting value is set. May be set to. In addition to or in place of the setting value "5" being set and the setting value "6" being set, all or part of the other setting values are set. The fact that it is set may also be the content suggested by the setting value suggestion effect. Furthermore, it is not a specific setting value, but the setting value is odd, the setting value is even, the setting value is relatively high, and the setting value is relatively low. Any of them may be used as information regarding the set value suggested by the set value suggestion effect.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is executed by using the left strike effect that encourages the left strike, but the method of launching the game ball in which the set value suggestion effect is performed is not limited to the left strike, and is right strike. You may execute the set value suggestion effect by using the right-handed effect that prompts. In this case, the set value suggestion effect may be executed in a specific period immediately after the transition to the right-handed gaming state or in the middle of the right-handed gaming state. It may be executed during the last specific period of the right-handed gaming state, or may be executed during the entire period of the right-handed gaming state.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is executed in a specific period immediately after the transition to the left-handed gaming state (normal game state), but the execution period of the set value suggestion effect is appropriately changed. You may. Further, in the fifth embodiment, the set value suggestion effect is executed when the game state related to right-handed strike is changed to the normal game state related to left-handed strike and the effect in the normal effect mode is started. The game state related to right-handed hitting such as the jackpot game state or the high-base game state is basically changed to the high-probability low-base game state or the low-probability low-base game state in which the player hits left, and is common according to the transition. The latent mode may be configured to be configurable so that the set value suggestion effect is executed when the effect of the latent mode is started.

In addition, even if the game state is not changed, for example, in the game state related to left-handed (during game state), if right-handed is performed, the appropriate firing method is left-handed, so left. It is configured to execute an effect that calls attention to return to hitting (left-handed attention-calling effect), and in the left-handed attention-calling effect, a set value suggestion effect is executed by setting the effect mode of the effect as a special mode. You may do so.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a sixth embodiment according to the present invention will be described based on the above-mentioned basic embodiment according to the present invention. In the following, mainly, the sixth embodiment will be described as different from the basic embodiment. Further, the same reference numerals and terms are used for the same configurations as those of the basic embodiments or the corresponding configurations.

The pachinko gaming machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment can measure the time elapsed since the power is turned on, and is set on condition that the predetermined condition is satisfied when the elapsed time reaches the predetermined time. An effect that suggests information about the value (set value suggestion effect) is executed. The details will be described later, but the predetermined condition is a value obtained by dividing the total number of gaming balls (prize balls) paid out in the pachinko gaming machine PY6 by the total number of launched gaming balls and multiplying by 100 (hereinafter, "measurement"). The value (referred to as "value") is determined to be equal to or greater than the determination value in the setting value suggestion effect execution determination for determining whether or not the determination value is equal to or greater than the determination value set according to the set value.

Here, FIG. 71 shows a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the game control board 100 side of the pachinko gaming machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment. As described in the basic embodiment, a sensor for detecting a winning game ball is provided in the first starting port 11 such as the first starting port sensor 11a and the second starting port sensor 12a, the second starting port 12, and the like. However, in the sixth embodiment, in addition to these sensors, as shown in FIG. 71, an out sensor 19a for detecting a game ball discharged to the outside of the game area 6 after entering the game area 6 is provided. Has been done.

Although detailed description is omitted, the game ball that has passed through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, and the out opening 19 is one in which the game ball can flow down. Collected in a route (not shown). That is, the launched game ball finally passes through this path and is discharged to the outside of the game area 6. In addition, one route through which the game ball passing through the general winning opening 10, the first starting opening 11, the second starting opening 12, the large winning opening 14, and the out opening 19 can flow down is referred to as an "out route". Refer to. A game ball that passes through the out path is referred to as an "out ball".

An out sensor 19a for detecting a game ball is provided in the out path. Therefore, the out sensor 19a detects all the fired game balls. Further, with the provision of the out sensor 19a, the game control microcomputer 101 determines whether or not an out ball has occurred in the sensor detection process in step S104. For example, as shown in FIG. 72, in the game control microcomputer 101, after step S224 of the sensor detection process, whether or not an out ball has occurred in step S225, in other words, whether or not the out sensor 19a has detected the game ball. Judge whether or not. When it is determined that the out ball has not occurred (NO in S225), the game control microcomputer 101 ends the sensor detection process as it is, while when it is determined that the out ball has occurred, it is determined in step S226 that the out ball has occurred. The indicated out designation command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, and the sensor detection process is completed. The game ball set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 is transmitted to the effect control board 120 by the output process in step S107.

Further, the game control microcomputer 101 issues a large prize opening prize ball payout designation command indicating that 14 prize balls are paid out according to the winning of the large winning opening prize ball 14 in the large winning opening prize ball processing in step S221. It is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 and transmitted to the effect control board 120.

Further, FIG. 72 shows a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the effect control board 120 side of the pachinko gaming machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 72, an RTC (Real-Time Clock) 131 is mounted on the staging control board 120. The RTC131 measures the current date and time (date and time). The RTC 131 is operated by the electric power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY6 from a predetermined island power supply device (not shown), and is provided in the power supply board 190 when the electric power is not supplied from the island power supply device. It is operated by the power supplied from the backup power supply circuit (not shown). Therefore, the RTC 131 can measure the current date and time even when the power of the pachinko gaming machine PY6 is not turned on. A backup power supply circuit for the RTC 131 may be provided on the staging control board 120. A circuit including a capacitor and a built-in battery (button battery, etc.) can be adopted as the backup power supply circuit.

Further, the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is provided with an out ball counter 132 that counts the total number of out balls generated after the power is turned on, in other words, the total number of game balls fired after the power is turned on. There is. Further, the effect RAM 124 of the effect control board 120 is provided with a prize ball counter 133 that counts the total number of game balls (prize balls) paid out by winning a prize in the large prize opening 14 after the power is turned on. ..

Next, the processing performed by the staging control microcomputer 121 will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a part (second half) of the flowchart relating to the received command analysis process (S4201) in the sixth embodiment. Whether or not the effect control microcomputer 121 has received the out designation command as step S4322 after determining that the setting value designation command has not been received in step S4320 or after completing the setting value setting process in step S4321. To judge. If it is determined that the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the out designation command, the process proceeds to step S4324 as it is, and if it is determined that the out designation command has been received, the process of counting the total number of out balls (out ball counting process) is performed in step S4323. ), Then the process proceeds to step S4324. The effect control microcomputer 121 adds "1" to the counter value of the out ball counter 132 in the out ball counting process.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in step S4324 whether or not the grand prize opening prize ball payout designation command has been received. If it is determined that the effect control microcomputer 121 has not received the large prize-winning prize ball payout designation command, the reception command analysis process is completed as it is, and if it is determined that the large prize-winning prize ball payout designation command has been received, the large prize-winning prize ball payout designation command is received. The reception command analysis process is completed after performing a process of counting the total number of game balls (prize balls) paid out based on the winning of the winning opening 14 (large winning opening prize ball counting process). In the effect control microcomputer 121, in the large prize opening prize ball counting process, the counter value of the prize ball counter 133 corresponds to the number of game balls (prize balls) paid out by winning the prize in the large winning opening 14. Add "14" to.

Further, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process of step S4012, the effect control microcomputer 121 performs a process related to the set value suggestion effect (set value suggestion effect process) after performing the light emission data creation process of step S4203. Here, the set value suggestion effect that can be executed in the sixth embodiment will be described. The set value suggestion effect includes a semi-confirmation effect and a confirmation effect.

The quasi-confirmation effect is an effect that suggests that the set value is one of two set values. The quasi-confirmation effect includes a quasi-confirmation effect (first quasi-confirmation effect) that suggests that the set value is either 1 or 6, and a quasi-confirmation effect that suggests that the set value is either 2 or 5. There is an effect (second semi-confirmation effect) and a semi-confirmation effect (third semi-confirmation effect) that suggests that the set value is either 3 or 4. The first quasi-confirmation effect can be executed when the set values are 1 and 6, the second quasi-confirmation effect can be executed when the set values are 2 and 5, and the third quasi-confirmation effect has a set value of 3. And 4 is feasible.

On the other hand, the confirmation effect is an effect that suggests that the set value is a certain set value. The confirmation effect includes a confirmation effect (first confirmation effect) that suggests that the set value is 6, a confirmation effect that suggests that the set value is 5, (second confirmation effect), and a set value of 4. There is a confirmation effect (third confirmation effect) that suggests that there is. The first confirmation effect can be executed when the set value is 6, the second confirmation effect can be executed when the set value is 5, and the third confirmation effect can be executed when the set value is 4. ..

Next, the set value suggestion effect processing will be described. The effect control microcomputer 121 first confirms the RTC 131 in the set value suggestion effect, and whether or not the time elapsed from turning on the power is a preset predetermined time, specifically, 5 hours or 10 hours. Is determined. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the time elapsed from the power-on is 5 hours or 10 hours, it is next whether or not the special figure fluctuation display or the jackpot game is executed, that is, the game control microcomputer 101. Determines whether or not any game is being executed. When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the special figure fluctuation display or the jackpot game is being executed, it is based on the total number of out balls indicated by the out ball counter 132 and the winning of the prize opening 14 indicated by the prize ball counter 133. The above-mentioned measured value is calculated based on the total number of prize balls, and it is determined whether or not the measured value is equal to or higher than the determination value corresponding to the currently set set value.

The determination value is set according to the set value. Therefore, as the judgment value according to the set value, the judgment value (V6) according to the set value "6", the judgment value (V5) according to the set value "5", and the judgment value according to the set value "4" ( There are V4), a determination value (V3) according to the set value "3", a determination value (V2) according to the set value "2", and a determination value (V1) according to the set value "1". The judgment value is set so that the judgment value becomes higher as the set value becomes higher. That is, the determination value is set so that the determination value V6> the determination value V5> the determination value V4> the determination value V3> the determination value V2> the determination value V1.

If the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that the measured value is equal to or greater than the determination value corresponding to the currently set value, and the time elapsed from turning on the power is 5 hours, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the semi-confirmation effect. If the semi-confirmation effect execution judgment is performed to determine whether or not the power is turned on and the time elapsed from turning on the power is 10 hours, the set value "4", the set value "5", and the set value "6" are further set. The confirmation effect execution determination is performed to determine whether or not to execute the confirmation effect on the condition that the confirmation effect is executed. This is because, as described above, the confirmation effect is an effect that suggests the set value "4", the set value "5", or the set value "6".

The quasi-confirmation effect execution determination is executed with reference to the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table. The semi-confirmation effect execution determination table is associated with the set value. FIG. 75A shows a configuration example of the semi-confirmation effect execution determination table. As shown in FIG. 75 (A), as the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table, the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value “6” and the quasi-confirmation effect execution determined associated with the set value “5”. The determination table, the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "4", the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "3", and the setting value "2" are associated with each other. A quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table and a quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "1" are provided. Each quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the quasi-confirmation effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 75 (A).

As described above, the quasi-confirmation effect performed when the set value "6" or the set value "1" is set is the first quasi-confirmation effect. Therefore, the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination based on the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "6" and the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination based on the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "1". Can be said to be a determination as to whether or not to execute the first quasi-confirmation effect (first quasi-confirmation effect execution determination). Similarly, the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination based on the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "5" and the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination based on the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "2". It can be said that the determination is a determination as to whether or not to execute the second quasi-confirmation effect (second quasi-confirmation effect execution determination). Further, the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination based on the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "4" and the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination based on the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "3". Can be said to be a determination as to whether or not to execute the third quasi-confirmation effect (third quasi-confirmation effect execution determination).

Here, according to the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6" and the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "1", the case of the setting value "6" is better. , The selection rate for performing the semi-confirmation effect (first semi-confirmation effect) is high. Further, according to the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5" and the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "2", the case of the setting value "5" is better. The selection rate for performing the quasi-confirmation effect (second quasi-confirmation effect) is high. Further, according to the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "4" and the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "3", the case of the setting value "4" is better. The selection rate for performing the quasi-confirmation effect (third quasi-confirmation effect) is high. That is, with respect to the first quasi-confirmation effect, the second quasi-confirmation effect, and the third quasi-confirmation effect, the higher the set value associated with the quasi-confirmation effect, the easier it is for the quasi-confirmation effect to be executed. Therefore, when the first quasi-confirmation effect, the second quasi-confirmation effect, and the third quasi-confirmation effect are executed, the higher setting value among the setting values associated with the quasi-confirmation effect is set. Can have expectations.

The staging control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value based on the set value flag stored in the effect RAM 124 when executing the semi-confirmation effect, and determines the semi-confirmation effect execution execution associated with the confirmed set value. The quasi-confirmation effect execution determination (first quasi-confirmation effect execution determination, second quasi-confirmation effect execution determination, third quasi-confirmation effect execution determination) is performed based on the table.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the first quasi-confirmation effect execution determination that "the quasi-confirmation effect (first quasi-confirmation effect) is to be executed", the first quasi-confirmation effect indicating the effect content of the first quasi-confirmation effect is started. The command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. Similarly, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the second quasi-confirmation effect execution determination that "the quasi-confirmation effect (second quasi-confirmation effect) is to be executed", the second quasi-accuracy representing the effect content of the second quasi-confirmation effect. When the proof effect start command is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and it is determined in the third quasi-confirmation effect execution determination that "the quasi-confirmation effect (third quasi-confirmation effect) is executed", the effect content of the third quasi-confirmation effect is determined. The third semi-confirmation effect start command representing the above is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

The first quasi-confirmation effect start command, the second quasi-confirmation effect start command, and the third quasi-confirmation effect start command set in the output buffer are output to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S4004. Then, when the image control board 140 receives the first quasi-confirmation effect start command, the display unit 50a performs the first quasi-confirmation effect of the effect content indicated by the first quasi-confirmation effect start command. Similarly, when the image control board 140 receives the second quasi-confirmation effect start command, the image control board 140 performs the second quasi-confirmation effect of the effect content indicated by the second quasi-confirmation effect start command on the display unit 50a, and starts the third quasi-confirmation effect. Upon receiving the command, the display unit 50a performs the third quasi-confirmation effect of the effect content indicated by the third quasi-confirmation effect start command. The specific production contents of the first quasi-confirmation effect, the second quasi-confirmation effect, and the third quasi-confirmation effect will be described later.

Further, the confirmation effect execution determination is executed with reference to the confirmation effect execution determination table. FIG. 75B shows a configuration example of the confirmation effect execution determination table. The confirmation effect execution determination table is associated with the set value. As shown in FIG. 75 (B), as the confirmation effect execution determination table, the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value “6” and the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value “5”. , A confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "4" is provided. Each confirmation effect execution determination table is appropriately set so that the selection rate for executing / not executing the semi-confirmation effect is a predetermined selection rate shown in FIG. 75 (B).

As described above, the confirmation effect performed when the set value "6" is set is the first confirmation effect. Therefore, it can be said that the confirmation effect execution determination based on the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "6" is a determination of whether or not to execute the first confirmation effect (first confirmation effect execution determination). Similarly, it can be said that the confirmation effect execution determination based on the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "5" is a determination of whether or not to execute the second confirmation effect (second confirmation effect execution determination). .. Further, it can be said that the confirmation effect execution determination based on the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the set value "4" is a determination of whether or not to execute the third confirmation effect (third confirmation effect execution determination).

Here, the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "6", the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the setting value "5", and the confirmation effect execution determination associated with the setting value "4". According to the table, the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect is high in the order of the setting value "6"> the setting value "5"> the setting value "4". That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is for the confirmation effect to be executed.

The staging control microcomputer 121 confirms the set value based on the set value flag stored in the effect RAM 124 when executing the confirmation effect, and displays the confirmation effect execution determination table associated with the confirmed set value. Based on this, the confirmation effect execution determination (first confirmation effect execution determination, second confirmation effect execution determination, third confirmation effect execution determination) is performed.

When the effect control microcomputer 121 determines that "the confirmation effect (first confirmation effect) is to be executed" in the first confirmation effect execution determination, the effect RAM 124 issues a first confirmation effect start command indicating the effect content of the first confirmation effect. Set in the output buffer of. Similarly, when the effect control microcomputer 121 determines in the second confirmation effect execution determination that "the confirmation effect (second confirmation effect) is to be executed", the effect control microcomputer 121 issues a second confirmation effect start command indicating the effect content of the second confirmation effect. When it is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124 and it is determined in the third confirmation effect execution determination that "the confirmation effect (third confirmation effect) is to be executed", the third confirmation effect start command indicating the effect content of the third confirmation effect is issued. Set in the output buffer of the staging RAM 124.

The first confirmation effect start command, the second confirmation effect start command, and the third confirmation effect start command set in the output buffer are output to the image control board 140 by the command transmission process in step S4004. Then, when the image control board 140 receives the first confirmation effect start command, the display unit 50a performs the first confirmation effect of the effect content indicated by the first confirmation effect start command. Similarly, when the image control board 140 receives the second confirmation effect start command, the image control board 140 performs the second confirmation effect of the effect content indicated by the second confirmation effect start command on the display unit 50a, and receives the third confirmation effect start command. , The third confirmation effect of the effect content indicated by the third confirmation effect start command is performed on the display unit 50a. The specific production contents of the first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the third confirmation effect will be described later.

Next, a specific example of the semi-confirmation effect will be described. The semi-confirmation effect is performed by displaying an image on the display unit 50a. In the following, the image constituting the semi-confirmation effect is referred to as a “quasi-confirmation effect image”. The quasi-confirmation effect image differs depending on the effect type of the quasi-confirmation effect. That is, the quasi-confirmation effect image constituting the first quasi-confirmation effect, the quasi-confirmation effect image constituting the second quasi-confirmation effect, and the quasi-confirmation effect image constituting the third quasi-confirmation effect are different from each other. In the following, the quasi-confirmation effect image constituting the first quasi-confirmation effect is referred to as a "first quasi-confirmation effect image", and the quasi-confirmation effect image constituting the second quasi-confirmation effect is referred to as a "second quasi-confirmation effect". The quasi-confirmation effect image constituting the third quasi-confirmation effect is referred to as a "third quasi-confirmation effect image".

The first quasi-confirmation effect image, the second quasi-confirmation effect image, and the third quasi-confirmation effect image are composed of predetermined characters wearing uniforms in common, but the uniform numbers attached to the uniforms are different. .. The jersey number of the first quasi-confirmation effect image is "16", the uniform number of the second quasi-confirmation effect image is "25", and the uniform number of the third quasi-confirmation effect image is "34". .. Since the first semi-confirmation effect suggests that the set value "1" or the set value "6" is set, it includes a uniform number representing "16" composed of the "1" and "6". By displaying the second semi-confirmation effect image, it is suggested that the set value "1" or the set value "6" is set. Similarly, since the second semi-confirmation effect suggests that the set value "2" or the set value "5" is set, the spine representing "25" composed of the "2" and "5". By displaying the second semi-confirmation effect image including the number, it is suggested that the set value "2" or the set value "5" is set. Further, since the third semi-confirmation effect suggests that the set value "3" or the set value "4" is set, the uniform number representing "34" composed of the "3" and "4". By displaying the second quasi-confirmation effect image including, it is suggested that the set value "3" or the set value "4" is set.

Here, FIG. 76 shows a specific example of the semi-confirmation effect image displayed on the display unit 50a. FIG. 76 (A) is a diagram showing a specific example of the first quasi-confirmation effect image, FIG. 76 (B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the second quasi-confirmation effect image, and FIG. 76 (C) is a diagram showing a specific example of the second quasi-confirmation effect image. It is a figure which shows the specific example of the quasi-confirmation effect image. As described above, when the first quasi-confirmation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image control board 140 displays the first quasi-confirmation effect image G71 shown in FIG. 76 (A) as the first quasi-confirmation effect. , Displayed on the display unit 50a in an superimposed manner on another image. Further, as described above, when the second quasi-confirmation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image control board 140 uses the second quasi-confirmation effect image shown in FIG. 76 (B) as the second quasi-confirmation effect. The G72 is displayed on the display unit 50a in an superimposed manner on another image. Further, as described above, when the third quasi-confirmation effect start command is transmitted to the image control board 140, the image control board 140 uses the third quasi-confirmation effect image shown in FIG. 76 (C) as the third quasi-confirmation effect. The G73 is displayed on the display unit 50a in an superimposed manner on another image.

The production time of the first quasi-confirmation effect, the second quasi-confirmation effect, and the third quasi-confirmation effect, that is, the first quasi-confirmation effect image G71, the second quasi-confirmation effect image G72, and the third quasi-confirmation effect image G73. Is set to be the same on the display unit 50a. The production time of the first quasi-confirmation effect, the second quasi-confirmation effect, and the third quasi-confirmation effect is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate, but in the sixth embodiment, it is set to 3 seconds.

Next, a specific example of the confirmation effect will be described. The confirmation effect is performed by displaying an image on the display unit 50a. In the following, the image constituting the confirmation effect is referred to as a “confirmation effect image”. The confirmation effect image differs depending on the effect type of the confirmation effect. That is, the confirmation effect image constituting the first confirmation effect, the confirmation effect image constituting the second confirmation effect, and the confirmation effect image constituting the third quasi-confirmation effect are different from each other. In the following, the confirmation effect image constituting the first confirmation effect is referred to as a "first confirmation effect image", and the confirmation effect image constituting the second confirmation effect is referred to as a "second confirmation effect image". 3 The confirmation effect image constituting the confirmation effect is referred to as a "third confirmation effect image".

Each of the first confirmation effect image, the second confirmation effect image, and the third confirmation effect image is composed of different characters. The first confirmation effect image is composed of character A, the second confirmation effect image is composed of character B, and the third confirmation effect image is composed of character C. Further, each confirmation effect is composed of an animation using each confirmation effect image. Specifically, in each confirmation effect, the confirmation effect image composed of characters runs around the peripheral portion of the display unit 50a and goes around.

Here, FIGS. 77 to 79 show specific examples of the confirmation effect performed by the display unit 50a. 77 is a diagram showing a specific example of the first confirmation effect, FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a specific example of the second confirmation effect, and FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a specific example of the third confirmation effect.

As described above, the image control board 140 starts the first confirmation effect as soon as it receives the first confirmation effect start command. In the first confirmation effect, first, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the first confirmation effect image G74 representing the character A is displayed at the center of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a. Next, as shown in FIGS. 77 (B) to 77 (C), the peripheral portion of the display unit 50a is run clockwise. Finally, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the first confirmation effect image G74 stops at the center of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a that has started running, and is shown in FIG. 77 (E). Disappears like. As described above, the first confirmation effect is configured from the appearance of the first confirmation effect image G74 to the time when the image G74 runs along the peripheral portion of the display unit 50a and disappears.

Further, as described above, the image control board 140 starts the second confirmation effect as soon as it receives the second confirmation effect start command. In the second confirmation effect, first, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the second confirmation effect image G75 representing the character B is displayed at the center of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a. Next, as shown in FIGS. 78 (B) to 78 (C), the second confirmation effect image G75 runs clockwise around the peripheral portion of the display unit 50a. Finally, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the second confirmation effect image G75 stops at the center of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a that has started running, and is shown in FIG. 78 (E). Disappears like. As described above, the period from the appearance of the second confirmation effect image G75 to the time when the second confirmation effect image G75 runs along the peripheral portion of the display unit 50a and disappears constitutes the second confirmation effect.

Further, as described above, the image control board 140 starts the third confirmation effect as soon as it receives the third confirmation effect start command. In the third confirmation effect, first, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the third confirmation effect image G76 representing the character C is displayed at the center of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a. Next, as shown in FIGS. 79 (B) to 79 (C), the third confirmation effect image G76 runs clockwise around the peripheral portion of the display unit 50a. Finally, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the third confirmation effect image G76 stops at the center of the lower end portion of the display unit 50a that has started running, and is shown in FIG. 79 (E). Disappears like. As described above, the period from the appearance of the third confirmation effect image G76 to the time when the third confirmation effect image G76 runs along the peripheral portion of the display unit 50a and disappears constitutes the third confirmation effect.

The first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the effect time of the third confirmation effect, that is, the first confirmation effect image G74, the second confirmation effect image G75, and the third confirmation effect image G76 are displayed on the display unit 50a. The time to do is set to be the same. The production time of the first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the third confirmation effect is not particularly limited and can be set as appropriate, but in the sixth embodiment, it is set to 10 seconds. Further, the operation contents (running method) of the first confirmation effect image G74, the second confirmation effect image G75, and the third confirmation effect image G76 related to the first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the third confirmation effect are substantially the same. Is set to.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment, the measured value calculated based on the total number of out balls and the total number of prize balls based on the winning of the large winning opening 14 is currently set. The confirmation effect is executed on condition that the judgment value is equal to or higher than the set value. That is, on that day, the confirmation effect is executed according to the actual results of the pachinko gaming machine PY6. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in reliability for the confirmation effect suggesting the set value. Further, according to the pachinko gaming machine PY6, it includes a condition that the measured value is equal to or higher than the judgment value corresponding to the currently set value, but basically the time elapsed since the power is turned on. At a predetermined time, an opportunity to perform a semi-confirmation production or a confirmation production comes. Therefore, as compared with the case where the propriety of the semi-confirmation effect or the execution of the confirmation effect is determined by a predetermined determination, it is possible to surely provide an opportunity for the execution, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration of the game interest. Further, the semi-confirmation effect or the confirmation effect is executed on condition that the game is performed by the game control microcomputer 101 such as the special figure variable display and the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate.

(Example of modification of the sixth embodiment)
Next, a modified example of the pachinko gaming machine PY6 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. The specific production contents related to the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect are not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. For example, the content of the semi-confirmation effect image may be other than the character wearing the uniform with the uniform number. Further, the content of the confirmation effect image may be other than the clockwise running of the peripheral portion of the character display unit 50a.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first quasi-confirmation effect, the second quasi-confirmation effect, and the third quasi-confirmation effect are distinguished by being configured so that the characters are common and the uniform numbers are different. It may be possible to distinguish by configuring the image so that the target, the effect time, the size of the image, or the color of the image are different. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the first confirmation effect, the second confirmation effect, and the third confirmation effect have substantially the same character actions, but are distinguished by being configured so that the types of characters are different. , The types of characters are the same, but they may be distinguished by being configured so that the movement of the character, the effect time, the size of the image, or the color of the image are different.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect are executed by displaying an image on the display unit 50a, but the effect device for performing the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect is not particularly limited and is appropriately used. You may change it. For example, the set value suggestion effect may be performed by using another effect device such as the sound output from the speaker 52, the operation by the panel movable body 55k, or the light emission by the frame lamp 53.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, as the information regarding the set value suggested by the confirmation effect, the set value "4" having a relatively high set value is set, and the set value "5" is set. And the setting value "6" is set, but this information is not limited to the sixth embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as information about the set value suggested by the confirmation effect, the set value "4" is set, the set value "5" is set, and the set value "6" is set. May be set to any one or part of the settings. Further, in addition to or in place of the setting value "4" being set, the setting value "5" being set, and the setting value "6" being set, other setting values are set. It may be the content that the confirmation staging suggests that all or part of the above is set.

Further, as the information regarding the set value suggested by the semi-confirmation effect, the set value "1" or "6" is set, the set value "2" or "5" is set, and the set value " Although it is set that "3" or "4" is set, this information is not limited to the sixth embodiment and can be changed as appropriate. For example, as information about the set value suggested by the semi-confirmation effect, the set value "1" or "6" is set, the set value "2" or "5" is set, and the set value " It may be set to any one or a part of the fact that "3" or "4" is set. Further, it may be used as information regarding the set value that the semi-confirmation effect suggests that the set value is an odd number and that the set value is an even number.

Further, in the sixth embodiment, the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect can be executed on condition that the measured value is equal to or more than the determination value corresponding to the set value, but any of the effects or any of them can be executed. One of the effects may be configured to be feasible even if the condition is not satisfied. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect can be executed on condition that the game is executed by the game control microcomputer 101. , Even if the condition is not satisfied, it may be configured to be feasible. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the quasi-confirmation effect and the quasi-confirmation effect are provided on the condition that the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination determines to execute the quasi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect execution determination determines that the quasi-confirmation effect is executed. However, for any of the effects or for either of the effects, the conditions may not be satisfied, and the effects may be configured to be feasible. That is, when the time elapsed from turning on the power reaches a predetermined time, if the measured value is equal to or greater than the judgment value corresponding to the set value, one or both of the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect must be performed. It may be executed.

Further, the selection rate for executing the quasi-confirmation effect in the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. Further, the relationship according to the set value of the selection rate for executing the quasi-confirmation effect in the quasi-confirmation effect execution determination for each quasi-confirmation effect is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. For example, both in the case of the set value "6" and in the case of the set value "1", the selection rate for executing the semi-confirmation effect may be the same. Alternatively, the selection rate for executing the semi-confirmation effect may be higher in the case of the set value "1" than in the case of the set value "6". The same applies to the second quasi-confirmation effect and the third quasi-confirmation effect.

Further, the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect in the confirmation effect execution determination is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. Further, regarding the confirmation effect, the relationship according to the set value of the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect in the confirmation effect execution determination is not limited to the sixth embodiment, and may be appropriately changed. For example, the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect may be the same in the case of the set value "6", the case of the set value "5", and the case of the set value "4". Alternatively, the selection rate for executing the confirmation effect in the order of the set value “6” <set value “5” <set value “4” may be increased.

Further, the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect may be executed when the time elapsed from turning on the power reaches a predetermined time, but the specific content of the predetermined time may be appropriately set. Further, in the sixth embodiment, the quasi-confirmation effect and the time elapsed from the power-on in which the confirmation effect can be executed are provided in two types, but may be one type or three or more types. In the case of one type, either one of the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect may be executed. Further, in the case of three or more types, an effect suggesting information regarding different setting values may be executed. Further, instead of the time elapsed from turning on the power, the time elapsed from the start of the game or the time may be set to the time during which the semi-confirmation effect and the confirmation effect can be executed.

7. Other modified examples Further, other modified examples of the pachinko gaming machine PY according to the basic embodiment and the pachinko gaming machine PY1 to the sixth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY6 according to the first embodiment will be described below. do. In the following, the pachinko gaming machine PY and the pachinko gaming machines PY1 to the pachinko gaming machine PY6 will be referred to as "pachinko gaming machine PY and the like".

The structures of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 are not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, a two-contact slide switch may be used instead of the set value cylinder 70 as a machine that enables the operation of changing the set value. In this case, if the knob is arranged at one position, the operation of changing the set value may be performed. Further, as a machine for performing an operation for setting a set value, a rotary switch or a slide switch may be used instead of the set value switch 71. In this case, the position of the knob may be directly associated with the set value. Further, the positions of the set value cylinder 70 and the set value switch 71 may be appropriately changed without particular limitation.

Further, the configuration of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, another display such as a dot matrix LED display may be used as the display for displaying the set value. Further, the position of the set value display 87 is not particularly limited and can be appropriately changed. For example, the set value display 87 may be arranged not on the game control board 100.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game RAM 104 is cleared by operating the set value cylinder 70 to change the set value, but the operating means for clearing the game RAM 104. The game RAM 104 may be cleared without performing an operation for changing the set value by providing a cylinder or the like.

Further, the operation for confirming the set value is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be appropriately set. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may be able to recognize the rotation operation to the handle 72k, and the set value may be determined by the rotation operation of the handle 72k. Alternatively, the game control microcomputer 101 can recognize the operation of the so-called "ball rental button" or "return button", and the set value is determined by the operation of these buttons. Is also good.

Further, although six setting values of the setting value "1" to the setting value "6" are provided as the setting values, the number of the setting values is not limited to six and may be appropriately set. Further, the identification information for the set value is not limited to the numbers such as "1" to "6", and may be characters or other symbols such as "A" to "F".

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, the big winning opening 14 can be opened in the big hit game, but a winning area that can be opened in the big hit game may be provided in addition to the big winning opening 14.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, when it is determined to be a specific jackpot symbol type, the game always proceeds in a high probability state after the jackpot game. That is, the setting of the high probability state is associated with the jackpot symbol type. However, the setting condition of the high probability state may be changed. For example, apart from the big prize device 14D, a second big prize device that can be opened and closed and allows a game ball to enter at the time of opening is provided at a position where the game ball in the game area 6 can reach, and a big hit game is in progress. When the game ball that has entered the second big prize device after the second big prize device is opened in a predetermined round game passes through a specific area provided on the downstream side thereof, a high probability state is reached with the end of the big hit game. May be set.

In this case, for example, a specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it easy to set a high probability state) that the second big prize device opens for a time (for example, 29.5 seconds) that makes it easy to enter the ball, and a second big prize device wins the ball. A non-specific jackpot symbol (a jackpot symbol that makes it difficult to set a high probability state) that opens for a difficult time (for example, 0.5 seconds) can be provided. Further, there are a specific area and a non-specific area as areas through which the game ball won in the second big prize device can pass, and a distribution device for distributing the game ball to the specific area and the non-specific area is provided. Then, although the opening time of the second prize-winning device is the same, the jackpot symbol and the high-probability state that make it easy to set the high-probability state can be obtained by combining the opening mode of the second prize-winning device and the operating mode of the distribution device. It is also possible to provide a jackpot symbol that is difficult to set.

Further, in a pachinko gaming machine PY or the like, the game control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the effect control board performs basic control related to the progress of the effect according to the progress of the game (control of the game). Although the game control and the effect control are performed on different boards, as in the case of 120, it may be configured to perform the game control and the effect control on one board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in the one board, or may be provided separately from the one board.

Although the effects related to the set values according to the first to sixth embodiments can be executed in different situations, one pachinko gaming machine PY1 to the pachinko gaming machine PY6 relates to the first embodiment to the sixth embodiment. It may be possible to appropriately execute the effect related to the set value.

Further, to the extent that there is no contradiction, the gaming machine of the present invention may be applied to other ball gaming machines such as an arrange ball machine and a sparrow ball gaming machine, a spinning machine (so-called "slot machine"), and the like. It is possible.

8. Other Inventions Disclosed in Embodiments The following inventions A to F are disclosed up to the preceding paragraph in this [mode for carrying out the invention]. In the description of the inventions A to F, the names and expressions of the corresponding configurations in the embodiment of the above-mentioned invention and the reference numerals used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the elements such as the means constituting each invention are not limited to this appendix. Invention A is a general term for the following inventions A1 to A3, invention B is a general term for the following inventions B1 to B5, invention C is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C7, and invention D is a general term for the following inventions C1 to C7. , The following inventions D1 to D5, the invention E is a general term for the following inventions E1 to E5, and the invention F is a general term for the following inventions F1 to F6.

8-1-1. Invention A1
The gaming machine according to the invention A1 is
Judgment means (for game control to perform S1602, S1609) for determining whether or not to make an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Microcomputer 101) and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) capable of setting set values (set values 1 to 6) for the determination means to perform the determination, and
A staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of executing a predetermined staging by the staging means is provided.
The staging means include one specific staging means.
The staging control means
When the first specific effect (non-loop second normal front stage BGM) of the first method (non-loop type) is executed as the effect by the specific effect means, and the second method (loop type) different from the first method. ) When the second specific effect (loop second normal front stage BGM) is executed, there is
It is characterized in that, when either one of the first specific effect and the second specific effect is being executed, the switch may be switched to the other based on the set value.

8-1-2. Invention A2
The gaming machine according to the invention A2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A1.
Further, a symbol display control means for notifying the determination result of the determination means by displaying the variation of the symbol (special symbol) is provided.
The first method is a method in which the effect is started every time the variation display of the symbol is started, and is completed in one variation display of the symbol.
The second method is characterized in that it can be executed over a plurality of times of variable display of the symbol.

8-1-3. Invention A3
The gaming machine according to the invention A3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention A2.
The specific staging means is composed of speakers.
The first specific effect and the second specific effect are characterized in that they are composed of BGM.

8-2-1. Invention B1
The gaming machine according to the invention B1 is
With a determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ,
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) capable of setting set values (set values 1 to 6) for the determination means to perform the determination, and
A staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of executing a predetermined staging by the staging means is provided.
The staging means includes a vibrating body (first staging button 40k) capable of vibrating and a speaker capable of outputting sound.
The effect control means may perform a specific effect (hybrid effect) of vibrating the vibrating body and outputting a vibration sound corresponding to the vibration based on the result of the determination and the set value. It is a feature.

8-2-2. Invention B2
The gaming machine according to the invention B2 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1.
The specific effect includes the first specific effect (look-ahead hybrid effect) in which the vibrating body vibrates for the first time (short vibration) and the first vibration sound (brut) corresponding to the vibration in the first time is output. , The vibrating body vibrates for a second time (long vibration) longer than the first time, and a second specific effect (Burururururururu) output by the second vibration sound (Burururururururu) corresponding to the vibration of the second hour ( The hybrid production) is characterized by having.

8-2-3. Invention B3
The gaming machine according to the invention B3 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2.
The first specific effect and the second specific effect are characterized in that the possibility that a set value relatively advantageous to the player is set is different between the first specific effect and the second specific effect.

8-2-4. Invention B4
The gaming machine according to the invention B4 is
A gaming machine according to invention B2 or invention B3.
The first specific effect and the second specific effect are characterized in that the possibility of becoming the advantageous gaming state is different.

8-2-5. Invention B5
The gaming machine according to the invention B5 is
A gaming machine according to invention B1.
After executing the specific effect a predetermined number of times (1 to 5 times), a special effect (the hybrid effect of the second effect type) in which only one of the vibration of the vibrating body and the output of the vibration sound is performed is executed. It is characterized by the fact that there are times.

8-3-1. Invention C1
The gaming machine according to the invention C1 is
With a determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ,
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting any one of a plurality of types (setting value 1 to setting value 6) as a setting value for the determination means to perform the determination. When,
A staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of executing a predetermined staging by the staging means is provided.
The effect control means can execute a predetermined alert (prepaid forget-to-take prevention effect).
The mode of effect of the alert includes either a normal mode (normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value) that can be executed regardless of the type of the set value, or the set value. It is characterized in that there is a special mode (a special mode that suggests information about a set value) that can be performed only in a specific type.

8-3-2. Invention C2
The gaming machine according to the invention C2 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1.
The alert can be executed by using an image display device capable of displaying an image and a voice output device capable of outputting sound.
The effect control means, for either the image display device or the voice output device, executes the attention alert in the normal aspect and the attention alert in the special aspect with the same effect content, while the effect content is the same. The image display device and any one of the audio output devices are characterized in that the alerting in the normal aspect and the alerting in the special aspect are executed with different production contents.

8-3-3. Invention C3
The gaming machine according to the invention C3 is
A gaming machine according to invention C1.
The staging means includes an image display device capable of displaying an image and an audio output device capable of outputting audio.
The staging control means performs either one of the above-mentioned alerting in the normal aspect and the above-mentioned alerting in the special aspect by using both the image display device and the audio output device, while the normal aspect. It is characterized in that either one of the above-mentioned alerting and the above-mentioned alerting in the special embodiment is executed by using only one of the image display device and the audio output device.

8-3-4. Invention C4
The gaming machine according to the invention C4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions C1 to C3.
Immediately before or immediately after the alert, a specific effect (CI display) indicating a specific item that is not directly related to the game content may be executed.
As an effect mode of the specific effect, there is a mode that can be executed regardless of the type of the set value, but there is no mode that can be executed only when the set value is any specific type. It is a feature.

8-3-5. Invention C5
The gaming machine according to the invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions C1 to C4.
The alerts include a first alert (prepaid forgetting prevention effect) that calls attention to the first item and a second alert (depression prevention effect) that calls attention to the second item that is different from the first item. ) And, there is
The first alert may be executed in the normal mode and the special alert may be executed in the special embodiment, while the second alert may be executed in the normal embodiment. However, it is characterized in that it is not carried out in the above-mentioned special embodiment.

8-3-6. Invention C6
The gaming machine according to the invention C6 is
A gaming machine according to invention C5.
It is further equipped with an operating means (return button 43k) to be operated when taking out a storage medium (prepaid card) storing predetermined information for executing a game.
The first alert is characterized in that an alert regarding forgetting to remove the storage medium is performed.

8-3-7. Invention C7
The gaming machine according to the invention C7 is
A gaming machine according to the invention C5 or the invention C6.
The advantageous gaming state includes a jackpot gaming state and a specific gaming state (high probability state, time saving state) that can occur after the jackpot gaming state.
The first alert and the second alert can be executed at the ending of the jackpot gaming state.
In the ending of the jackpot gaming state executed when it is determined in the determination in the normal gaming state that the advantageous gaming state is set, both the first alerting and the second alerting are executed, and the specific game is executed. The second alert is executed, but the first alert is not executed in the ending of the jackpot gaming state executed when it is determined in the determination in the state that the advantageous gaming state is set. ..

8-4-1. Invention D1
The gaming machine according to the invention D1 is
With a determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ,
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S7) capable of setting set values (set values 1 to 6) for the determination means to perform the determination, and
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means (the game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1502, S1503, S1504) that executes the symbol display (special figure variable display) that notifies the result of the determination, and
A staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of executing a predetermined staging by the staging means is provided.
The staging control means is set when the number of times the symbol display is executed (the number of addictions) after the predetermined condition is satisfied is the number of times associated with the set value set at that time. It is characterized by executing a set value suggestion effect (set value suggestion effect) that suggests.

8-4-2. Invention D2
The gaming machine according to the invention D2 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1.
The set value that can be set by the setting means includes a first set value (set value 5) and a second set value (set value 6) that is different from the first set value.
The number of times associated with the first set value (555 times, etc.) and the number of times associated with the second set value (666 times, etc.) are different.
The effect content of the set value suggestion effect executed when the first set value is set, the effect content of the set value suggestion effect executed when the second set value is set, and the effect content of the set value suggestion effect. Is characterized by being the same.

8-4-3. Invention D3
The gaming machine according to the invention D3 is
A gaming machine according to invention D1.
The set value includes a first set value (set value 5) and a second set value (set value 6) different from the first set value.
The number of times associated with the first set value (456 times) and the number of times associated with the second set value (456 times) are the same.
The effect content of the set value suggestion effect executed when the first set value is set, the effect content of the set value suggestion effect executed when the second set value is set, and the effect content of the set value suggestion effect. Is characterized by being the same.

8-4-4. Invention D4
The gaming machine according to the invention D4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions D1 to D3.
The advantageous gaming state includes a jackpot gaming state.
The number of times the symbol display is executed after the predetermined condition is satisfied is the number of times the symbol display is executed without the next jackpot gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is executed. And.

8-4-5. Invention D5
The gaming machine according to the invention D5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions D1 to D4.
The symbol display control means displays the symbol in a variable manner in the symbol display, and then stops and displays the symbol in a manner suggesting the result of the determination.
The effect control means is characterized in that the set value suggestion effect is executed when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

8-5-1. Invention E1
The gaming machine according to the invention E1 is
With a determination means (game control microcomputer 101 that performs S1602 and S1609) that determines whether or not to make an advantageous gaming state (big hit gaming state, high probability state, time saving state, etc.) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. ,
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting any one of a plurality of types (setting value 1 to setting value 6) as a setting value for the determination means to perform the determination. When,
A staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of executing a predetermined staging by the staging means is provided.
In a gaming machine where the game method may be switched (right-handed → left-handed)
The effect control means can execute a specific effect (left-handed effect) that allows the player to recognize the switching of the game method.
The effect mode of the specific effect includes a normal mode (normal (default) normal mode that does not suggest information about the set value) that can be executed regardless of the type of the set value, and the set value. It is characterized in that there is a special mode (a special mode that suggests information about a set value) that can be performed only in a specific type.

8-5-2. Invention E2
The gaming machine according to the invention E2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1.
The specific effect can be executed by using an image display device capable of displaying an image and an audio output device capable of outputting audio.
The effect control means, for either the image display device or the audio output device, executes the specific effect of the normal aspect and the specific effect of the special aspect with the same effect content, while the effect content is the same. The image display device and any one of the audio output devices are characterized in that the specific effect of the normal aspect and the specific effect of the special aspect are executed with different effect contents.

8-5-3. Invention E3
The gaming machine according to the invention E3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E1.
The staging means includes an image display device capable of displaying an image and an audio output device capable of outputting audio.
The effect control means performs either one of the specific effect of the normal aspect and the specific effect of the special aspect by using both the image display device and the audio output device, while the normal aspect. It is characterized in that any one of the specific effect of the above and the specific effect of the special aspect is executed by using only one of the image display device and the audio output device.

8-5-4. Invention E4
The gaming machine according to the invention E4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions E1 to E3.
The game method includes a first game method (left-handed) and a second game method (right-handed) different from the first game method.
The specific effect includes a first specific effect (right-handed effect) that allows the player to recognize the switching from the first game method to the second game method, and the first from the second game method. There is a second specific effect (left-handed effect) that allows the player to recognize the switch to the game method.
The second specific effect may be executed in the normal mode or the special mode, while the first specific effect may be executed in the normal mode. It is characterized in that it is not performed in a special manner.

8-5-5. Invention E5
The gaming machine according to the invention E5 is
A gaming machine according to the invention E4.
Further equipped with a launch operation means (handle 72k) that can be operated to launch the game ball toward the game area where the game ball can flow down.
The game area includes a first specific game area (left game area 6A) and a second specific game area (right game area 6B) in which the operation modes for flowing the game ball are different from each other.
In the normal gaming state, it is appropriate to let the game ball flow down to the first specific gaming area, while in the advantageous gaming state, it is appropriate to let the game ball flow down to the second specific gaming area.
The first game method is to operate the launch operation means (left-handed) so as to cause the game ball to flow down to the first specific game area, and the second game method is to specify the game ball to the second specific game area. It is characterized in that the launching operation means is operated (right-handed) so as to flow down to the game area.

8-6-1. Invention F1
The gaming machine according to the invention F1 is
A launching means (launching device 72) that launches a game ball toward a game area where the game ball can flow down, and
The determination means (S1602, S1609) for determining whether or not to execute the jackpot game by passing the game ball through the start areas (first start port 11, second start port 12) provided in the game area is performed. Game control microcomputer 101) and
A setting means (game control microcomputer 101 for performing S7) capable of setting any one of a plurality of types (setting value 1 to setting value 6) as a setting value for the determination means to perform the determination. When,
A staging control means (microcomputer 121 for staging control) capable of executing a predetermined staging by the staging means, and
A gaming machine equipped with at least a prize ball payout means (payout control board 170) capable of paying out a game ball as a prize ball by satisfying a predetermined condition (winning to the big prize opening 14) in the jackpot game. There,
The staging control means
It is possible to calculate a predetermined calculated value (measured value) based on the number of game balls fired in the game area and the number of game balls paid out as prize balls.
When the calculated value is higher than the determination value (V1 to V6) set according to the set value, it is possible to execute the set value effect (confirmation effect) suggesting the set value. And
The determination value increases as the set value increases.

8-6-2. Invention F2
The gaming machine according to the invention F2 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F1.
Further equipped with a timekeeping means (RTC131) capable of measuring the time elapsed since the gaming machine was turned on.
The effect control means is characterized in that the set value effect can be executed on condition that the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time.

8-6-3. Invention F3
The gaming machine according to the invention F3 is
A gaming machine according to the invention F1.
Further equipped with a timekeeping means (RTC131) capable of measuring the time,
The effect control means is characterized in that it is possible to execute the set value effect on the condition that the time measured by the time measuring means reaches a predetermined time.

8-6-4. Invention F4
The gaming machine according to the invention F4 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the inventions F1 to F3.
The staging control means
When a specific setting value is set as the setting value, it is possible to execute the specific setting value effect suggesting that the specific setting value is set as the setting value effect.
When the specific setting value and a predetermined setting value different from the specific setting value are set, the staging control means is set with the specific setting value or the predetermined setting value. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a quasi-set value effect (quasi-confirmation effect) that suggests that.

8-6-5. Invention F5
The gaming machine according to the invention F5 is
A gaming machine according to invention F4 including invention F2.
It is possible to execute the semi-set value effect on condition that the elapsed time has reached the first time.
It is characterized in that the set value effect can be executed on condition that the elapsed time becomes the second time longer than the first time.

8-6-6. Invention F6
The gaming machine according to the invention F6 is
A gaming machine according to invention F4 including invention F3.
The staging control means
It is possible to execute the semi-set value effect on condition that the time measured by the timekeeping means is the first time.
It is characterized in that the set value effect can be executed on condition that the time measured by the time measuring means becomes the second time after the first time.

PY, PY1 to PY6 ... Pachinko game machine 1 ... Game board 11 ... 1st starting port 11a ... 1st starting port sensor 12 ... 2nd starting port 12a ... 2nd starting port sensor 14 ... Large winning opening 14a ... Large winning opening sensor 50 ... Image display device 50a ... Display unit 52 ... Speaker 53 ... Frame lamp 55 ... Panel movable device 55k ... Panel movable body 70 ... Set value cylinder 70a ... Set value cylinder sensor 71 ... Set value switch 71a ... Set value switch sensor 100 ... Game control board 101 ... Game control microcomputer 120 ... Production control board 121 ... Production control microcomputer 140 ... Image control board

Claims (1)

A determination means for determining whether or not to make the gaming state more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and
A setting means capable of setting a specific condition for the determination means to make the determination, and a setting means.
It is equipped with a staging control means capable of executing a predetermined staging by the staging means.
The staging means includes a vibrating body capable of vibrating and a speaker capable of outputting sound.
The effect control means may execute a specific effect of vibrating the vibrating body and outputting a vibration sound corresponding to the vibration based on the result of the determination and the specific condition .
The specific effect includes a first specific effect in which the number of times the vibrating body vibrates in the specific effect and the number of times the vibrating sound is output are the same, and the number of times the vibrating body vibrates in the specific effect and the above. There is a second specific effect that differs from the number of times the vibration sound is output.
A gaming machine characterized in that the possibility of becoming the advantageous gaming state differs between when the first specific effect is executed and when the second specific effect is executed .

Images